Honda - Passport - Owners Manual - 2019 - 2019.PDF

2019 OWNER’S MANUAL 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 0 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 3 WARNING California Proposition 65 Warning Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner. Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 1 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment. Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment. Software End User License Agreement You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including: Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement. You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746. Privacy Notice This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices. A Few Words About Safety Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility. ● Safety Labels - on the vehicle. ● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean: 3DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions. 3WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions. 3CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions. ● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. ● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. ● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely. This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 2 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Contents This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold. This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model. Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features. This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada. 2 Safe Driving P. 31 For Safe Driving P. 32 Seat Belts P. 37 Airbags P. 45 2 Instrument Panel P. 75 Indicators P. 76 Gauges and Displays P. 104 2 Controls P. 129 Clock P. 130 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 133 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 165 Moonroof * P. 164 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 198 2 Features P. 225 Audio System P. 226 General Information on the Audio System P. 330 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 381, 406 2 Driving P. 433 Before Driving P. 434 Towing a Trailer P. 440 Parking Your Vehicle P. 539 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 550 The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. 2 Maintenance P. 557 Before Performing Maintenance P. 558 Maintenance MinderTM P. 561 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 584 Remote Transmitter Care P. 599 Accessories and Modifications P. 607 2 Handling the Unexpected P. 609 Tools P. 610 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 611 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 627 Fuses P. 631 Refueling P. 638 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 639 2 Information P. 641 Specifications P. 642 Emissions Testing P. 647 Identification Numbers P. 644 Warranty Coverages P. 649 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 3 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Contents Quick Reference Guide Child Safety P. 58 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 73 Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 148 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 186 Climate Control System P. 217 Security System P. 158 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 161 Adjusting the Seats P. 188 Audio System Basic Operation P. 233, 251 Customized Features P. 352, 359 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 450 Refueling P. 552 Audio Error Messages P. 327 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * P. 378 When Driving P. 452 Honda Sensing® P. 490 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 555 Maintenance Under the Hood P. 567 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 588 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 600 Engine Does Not Start P. 619 Emergency Towing P. 636 Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 645 Authorized Manuals P. 651 Braking P. 535 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 579 Battery P. 597 Cleaning P. 602 Jump Starting P. 622 Overheating P. 625 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 637 Reporting Safety Defects P. 646 Customer Service Information P. 652 P. 4 Safety Labels P. 74 Safe Driving P. 31 Instrument Panel P. 75 Controls P. 129 Features P. 225 Driving P. 433 Maintenance P. 557 Handling the Unexpected P. 609 Information P. 641 Index P. 653 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 4 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Quick Reference Guide Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❚ ECON Button (P474) ❚ System Indicators (P76) ❚ Gauges (P104) ❚ Driver Information Interface (P105) ❚ (Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P478) ❚ Parking Sensor System Button * (P542) ❚ Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button (P496) ❚ Heated Windshield Button * (P181) ❚ Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button (P529) ❚ Audio System (P233, 251) ❚ Navigation System * () See the Navigation System Manual ❚ Audio/Information Screen (P234, 252) ❚ Hazard Warning Button ❚ Climate Control System (P217) ❚ Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button (P180) ❚ Front Seat Heater Buttons * (P211) ❚ Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation Buttons * (P212) ❚ ENGINE START/STOP Button (P165) ❚ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P185) 4 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 5 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Quick Reference Guide ❚ Headlights/Turn Signals (P168, 169) ❚ Fog Lights * (P172) ❚ LaneWatchTM* (P483) ❚ Paddle Shifter (Shift down) (P467) ❚ Audio Remote Control Buttons (P230) ❚ 3 / 4 Button (P107, 230) ❚ Brightness Control (P182) ❚ Paddle Shifter (Shift up) (P467) ❚ Wipers/Washers (P177) ❚ Heated Steering Wheel Button * (P214) ❚ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons (P505) ❚ Interval Button (P513) ❚ Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button (P520) ❚ Horn (Press an area around .) ❚ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons * () See the Navigation System Manual ❚ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Buttons (P381, 406) ❚ (home) Button (P107, 230) ❚ ENTER Button (P107, 230) * Not available on all models 5 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 6 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❚ Power Window Switches (P161) ❚ Master Door Lock Switch (P146) ❚ Memory Buttons * (P184) ❚ SET Button * (P184) (P553) ❚ Rearview Mirror (P186) ❚ HomeLink® Buttons * (P379) ❚ Door Mirror Controls (P187) ❚ Driver’s Front Airbag (P48) ❚ Passenger’s Front Airbag (P48) ❚ Accessory Power Socket (P205) ❚ USB Port (P227) ❚ Glove Box (P201) ❚ Interior Fuse Box (P634) ❚ Parking Brake (P535) ❚ Interior Fuse Box (P633) ❚ Hood Release Handle (P568) 6 ❚ Power Tailgate Button * (P152) ❚ Fuel Fill Door Release Button ❚ Shift Button (P460) ❚ Mode Button * (P475) ❚ Snow Button * (P475) ❚ Auto Idle Stop OFF Button (P469) ❚ Accessory Power Socket (P205) ❚ Auxiliary Input Jack (P228) ❚ USB Port (P227) 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 7 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Quick Reference Guide ❚ Accessory Power Socket * (P206) ❚ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P42) ❚ Seat Belts (P40) ❚ Sun Visors ❚ Vanity Mirrors ❚ Moonroof Switch * (P164) ❚ Map Lights (P199) ❚ Sunglasses Holder (P210) ❚ Grab Handle ❚ Coat Hook (P209) ❚ Front Seat (P188) ❚ Side Airbags (P52) ❚ AC Power Outlet * (P206) ❚ USB Ports * (P228) ❚ Rear Seat Heater Buttons * (P213) ❚ Rear Seat (P192) ❚ Side Curtain Airbags (P54) ❚ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P66) ❚ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P69) ❚ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P63) ❚ Cargo Area Light (P200) * Not available on all models 7 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 8 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❚ Maintenance Under the Hood (P567) ❚ Windshield Wipers (P177, 584) ❚ Power Door Mirrors (P187) ❚ Side Turn Signal Lights * (P168, 582) ❚ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P136) ❚ Headlights (P169, 579) ❚ Front Side Marker Lights (P169, 580) ❚ Daytime Running Lights /Parking Lights (P169, 173, 580) ❚ Front Turn Signal Lights (P168, 581) ❚ Tires (P588, 611) ❚ Fog Lights * (P172, 581) ❚ How to Refuel (P553) ❚ High-Mount Brake Light (P583) ❚ Rear Wiper (P179, 586) ❚ Rear License Plate Lights (P583) ❚ Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P148) ❚ Multi-View Rear Camera (P550) ❚ Tailgate Outer Handle (P153) ❚ Back-Up Lights (P583) ❚ Brake/Taillights (P582) ❚ Rear Side Marker Lights (P582) ❚ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P582) 8 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 9 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Auto Idle Stop Function At Deceleration Automatic transmission Engine status Stop the vehicle and depress the brake pedal. Quick Reference Guide To improve fuel economy, the engine stops and then restarts as detailed below. When Auto Idle Stop is on, the Auto Idle Stop indicator (green) comes on. (P468) On Stop Keep the brake pedal depressed. Off Start-up Release the brake pedal. Restarting * Not available on all models 9 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 10 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Eco Assist® System Quick Reference Guide Ambient Meter ● The color of the ambient meter changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven in a fuel efficient manner. ECON Button (P474 ) Helps maximize fuel economy. ECON Mode Indicator (P84 ) Comes on when the ECON button is pressed. 10 The message is displayed for a few seconds when the ECON button is pressed. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 11 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Safe Driving 木曜日 午後３時２９分 (P31) ● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision. Child Safety (P58) ● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. ● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. ● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat. Quick Reference Guide Airbags (P45) Exhaust Gas Hazard (P73) ● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate. Seat Belts (P37) Before Driving Checklist (P434) ● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat. ● Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly. ● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted. Fasten your lap belt as low as possible. 11 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 12 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Instrument Panel 木曜日 午後３時２９分 (P75) Quick Reference Guide Gauges (P104)/Driver Information Interface (P105)/System Indicators (P76) M (Sequential mode) Indicator/ Immobilizer System Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator Indicator/Security System Alarm Indicator Temperature Gauge Tachometer System Indicators Intelligent Traction Speedometer Management Malfunction Indicator Lamp Indicator System Indicators Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator Canada (Red) U.S. Charging System Indicator Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Low Fuel Indicator Supplemental Restraint System Indicator Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) System Indicator Econ Mode Indicator VSA® OFF Indicator U.S. Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber) Gear Position Indicator/ Transmission System Indicator Driver Information Interface Fuel Gauge System Message Indicator Canada Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator Blind spot information System Indicator * Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Green/ Amber) 12 Lights Indicators System Indicators Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Green/ Amber) Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)/ Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green) Lights On Indicator High Beam Indicator Fog Light Indicator Auto High-Beam Indicator Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator All-wheel drive system (AWD) Indicator * 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 13 ページ Controls ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 (P129) These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. ● Rotate to select. ● Press to enter. Models with color audio system Models with Display Audio d Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF. e Select Set Date or Set Time. f Adjust the dates, hours and minutes by selecting 3 / 4 . g Select Save to set the time. To adjust time Quick Reference Guide Clock (P130) Models with navigation system The navigation system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically. a Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button for two seconds. To adjust date b Select Adjust Clock, then press c Rotate d Press to switch to minute adjustment. e Rotate f Press to switch to Set. a Select g Press to complete clock adjustment. b Select System, then Date & Time. c Select Set Date & Time. . ENGINE START/STOP Button (P165) Press the button to change the vehicle’s power mode. to adjust the hours. to adjust the minutes. , then select Settings. * Not available on all models 13 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 14 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Turn Signals (P168) Turn Signal Control Lever Quick Reference Guide Right Left 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Wipers and Washers (P177) Wiper/Washer Control Lever MIST OFF AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically INT*2: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe Lights (P169) Pull toward you to spray washer fluid. Light Control Switches High Beam Low Beam Adjustment Ring Flashing (- : Low Sensitivity*1 (- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2 (+ : High Sensitivity*1 (+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2 *1:Models with automatic intermittent operation *2:Models with manual intermittent operation 14 Models with automatic intermittent wipers AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system: ● Cleaning the windshield ● Driving through a car wash ● No rain present Steering Wheel (P185) ● To adjust, push the adjustment lever down, adjust to the desired position, then pull up the lever back in place. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 15 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Tailgate (P148) ● Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time. Outer Handle Models with Hands Free Access Use a forward and back kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper to open or close the power tailgate while carrying the smart entry remote. ● Press the tailgate outer handle to unlock and open the tailgate when you carry the smart entry remote. Quick Reference Guide (P145) Models with power tailgate ● Press the power tailgate button on the driver’s door or the remote transmitter to open and close the power tailgate. 1 sec. 15 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 16 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Power Door Mirrors (P187) Quick Reference Guide ● With the power mode in ON, move the selector switch to L or R. ● Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror. ● Press the folding button * to fold in and out the door mirrors. Folding Button * Selector Switch 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Power Windows (P161) ● With the power mode in ON, open and close the power windows. ● If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger’s window can be opened and closed with its own switch. ● If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator is on), each passenger’s window switch is disabled. Power Window Lock Button Indicator Adjustment Switch Window Switch 16 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 17 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Climate Control System * (P217) Rear Climate Control * (P222) AUTO Button Driver’s Side Temperature Control Switch (Recirculation) Button Rear Temperature Control Buttons Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Switch / (Rear Fan Control) Buttons Quick Reference Guide ● Press the AUTO button to activate the rear climate control system. ● Press the button to turn the system on or off. ● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system. ● Press the button to turn the system on or off. ● Press the button to defrost the windshield. (On/Off) Button SYNC (Synchronization) Button Mode Control Button Air flows from dashboard vents. Air flows from floor and dashboard vents. Air flows from floor vents. Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents. (Windshield Defroster) Button Rear AUTO Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button (Rear On/ Off) Button Fan Control Button Mode Control Button Air flows from the rear console vents. Air flow from the rear console vents and floor vents. Air flows from the rear floor vents. * Not available on all models 17 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 18 ページ Features ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 (P225) Quick Reference Guide Audio system (P226) Models with color audio system (P233) (Day/Night) Button Audio/Information Screen (Phone) Button RADIO Button (Sound) Button MEDIA Button VOL / Knob Selector Knob (Volume/Power) MENU/CLOCK Button / (Skip/Seek) Buttons (Back) Button Preset Buttons (1-6) 18 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 19 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Models with Display Audio (P 251) For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual Quick Reference Guide (Home) Icon (Back) Icon (Day/Night) Icon VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Audio/Information Screen 19 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 20 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Audio Remote Controls 午後３時２９分 Models with Display Audio / 3 / 4 / (+ / (- Bar (P230) Buttons Quick Reference Guide Models with color audio system / Buttons (+ / (- Bar ENTER Button SOURCE Button ● (+ / (- Bar Press to adjust the volume up/down. ● SOURCE Button Press to change the audio mode: FM1/FM2/AM/USB/iPod/ Bluetooth® Audio/AUX ● / Buttons Radio: Press to change the preset station. Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station. USB device/Bluetooth® Audio: Press to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder. 20 木曜日 ● (+ / (- Bar Press to adjust the volume up/down. ● 3 / 4 / / /ENTER Buttons Press 3 or 4 to select Now Playing on the home screen of the driver information interface, and then press the ENTER button. Press 3 or 4 to cycle through the audio mode as follows: Android Auto/Apple CarPlay/SiriusXM® */ AUX Input/AM/Bluetooth® Audio/Social Playlist/FM/My Honda Music/USB/iPod Radio: Press / to change the preset station. USB device/My Honda Music/Bluetooth® Audio: Press / to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 21 ページ Driving ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 (P433) Quick Reference Guide Automatic Transmission (P460) ● Select (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. ● Gear selection Gear Position Indicator The gear position indicator and the shift button indicator indicate the current gear selection. Shift Button Indicator Gear Position Indicator Park Press the (P button. Used when parking or before turning off or starting the engine. Transmission is locked. Intelligent Traction Management Button Reverse Pull back the (R button. Used when reversing. Neutral Press the (N button. Transmission is not locked. Drive/S Position Each time you press the D/S button, the mode switches between Drive and S position mode. Used for: Drive ● Normal driving (gears change between 1st and 9th automatically) ● Temporarily driving in the sequential mode S Position ● Automatically changing gears between 1st and 8th (8th gear is used only at high speed) ● Driving in the sequential mode * Not available on all models 21 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 22 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Paddle Shifters (P467) 午後３時２９分 Quick Reference Guide ● Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual transmission (1st through 9th). This is useful for engine braking. When the transmission is in (D ● The transmission will shift back Gear Position Indicator to automatic mode once the M (sequential system detects that the vehicle mode) is cruising. Indicator When the transmission is in (S ● Holds the selected gear, and the M (sequential mode) indicator comes on. Sequential Mode Gear ● The sequential mode gear Selection Indicator selection is shown in the instrument panel. Shift Down (Paddle Shifter 22 木曜日 Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 23 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 VSA® On and Off (P478) CMBSTM On and Off 午後３時２９分 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist (P486, 630) ● The TPMS monitors tire pressure. ● TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine. ● TPMS fill assist provides audible and visual guidance during tire pressure adjustment. Refueling (P552) Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher Fuel tank capacity: 19.5 US gal (73.8 L) a Press the fuel fill door release button. b After refueling, wait for about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle. (P496) ● When a possible collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision. ● The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine. ● To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep. Quick Reference Guide ● The Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. ● VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine. ● To partially disable or fully restore VSA® function, press and hold the button until you hear a beep. 木曜日 23 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 24 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Honda Sensing® Quick Reference Guide Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located behind the emblem and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rear view mirror. The camera is located behind the rearview mirror. Front Sensor Camera 木曜日 午後３時２９分 (P490) Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P493) Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (P505) Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator. Radar Sensor The radar sensor is behind the emblem. 24 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P518) Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane. Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System (P527) Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 25 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Maintenance 木曜日 午後３時２９分 (P557) ● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary. ● Check brake fluid. ● Check the battery condition monthly. a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the dashboard. b Locate the hood latch lever, pull it up, and then raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever. c Quick Reference Guide Under the Hood (P567) Wiper Blades (P584) ● Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield. Tires (P588) Lights (P579) ● Inspect tires and wheels regularly. ● Check tire pressures regularly. ● Install snow tires for winter driving. ● Inspect all lights regularly. When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place. 25 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 26 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Handling the Unexpected Quick Reference Guide Flat Tire (P611) Engine Won’t Start (P619) Overheating (P625) ● Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire located in the cargo area. ● If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery. ● Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down. Indicators Come On (P627) Blown Fuse (P631) Emergency Towing (P636) ● Identify the indicator and consult the owner’s manual. 26 (P609) ● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate. ● Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 27 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 What to Do If ● ● The steering wheel may be locked. Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button. Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes? This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal. u Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P537) The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why? Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, slide the lever up to the unlock position. Quick Reference Guide Canadian models The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY. Why? 27 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 28 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 午後３時２９分 Quick Reference Guide Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors? If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security. Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver’s door? The beeper sounds when: ● The power mode is in ACCESSORY. ● The exterior lights are left on. ● The Auto Idle Stop is in operation. Models with walk away auto lock® Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door? 28 木曜日 The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock operating range before the door completely closes. u Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®) * (P139) Why does the beeper sound when I start driving? The beeper sounds when: ● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts. ● The parking brake pedal is not fully released. Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal? The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 29 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 ● I'm seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that? The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention.Check tire pressure. u If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks (P630) ● Fasten the driver’s seat belt. Close the driver’s door and manually change the gear position. u When opening the driver’s door (P463) * Not available on all models Quick Reference Guide Why does the gear position automatically change to (P when I open the driver’s door to check for parking space lines when reversing? 29 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 30 ページ 30 ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 31 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Safe Driving You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual. For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions.............. 32 Important Handling Information......... 34 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 35 Safety Checklist ................................. 36 Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts ........................ 37 Fastening a Seat Belt .......................... 40 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 44 Airbags Airbag System Components............... 45 Types of Airbags ................................ 48 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 48 Side Airbags....................................... 52 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 54 Airbag System Indicators.................... 55 Airbag Care ....................................... 57 Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 58 Safety of Infants and Small Children .. 60 Safety of Larger Children ................... 71 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 73 Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 74 31 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 32 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 For Safe Driving The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important. Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ■ Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly. ■ Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat. ■ Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual. ■ Don’t drink and drive Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either. 32 1Important Safety Precautions Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 33 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions ■ Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted. Safe Driving ■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving. ■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance. ■ Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle Children, pets and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time. 33 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 34 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information Important Handling Information Safe Driving 34 Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier. These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts. 1Important Handling Information For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read: 2 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle P. 458 2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 450 Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 35 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features Your Vehicle’s Safety Features 1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash. Safety Cage Crush Zones Seats and Seat-Backs Head Restraints Collapsible Steering Column Seat Belts Front Airbags Side Airbags Side Curtain Airbags Door Locks Seat Belt Tensioners Safe Driving Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash. However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly. The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers. 35 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 36 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist Safety Checklist Safe Driving For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. • After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate. 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 144 • Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash. 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 188 • Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position. 2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions P. 194 • Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well. 2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 40 • Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height and weight. 2 Child Safety P. 58 36 1Safety Checklist If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on the driver information interface, a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the message disappears. 2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 91 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 37 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers ■ Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body. The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats. 1About Your Seat Belts 3 WARNING Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags. Safe Driving Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly. Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury. Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts. If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly. 2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 66 Continued 37 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 38 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts ■ Proper use of seat belts 1About Your Seat Belts Safe Driving Follow these guidelines for proper use: • All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. • Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash. • Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash. • Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. ■ Seat Belt Reminder 1Seat Belt Reminder The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts. If you set the power mode to ON and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened. 38 If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt. The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the power mode is set to ON. When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound. The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them. 2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 58 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 39 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts ■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags. The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash. During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates. Safe Driving The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety. 1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners 39 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 40 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Fastening a Seat Belt After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat: 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 188 Safe Driving Pull out slowly. Correct Seated Posture. Buckle No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible. Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism. 2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything. Latch Plate 40 1. Pull the seat belt out slowly. 1Fastening a Seat Belt 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 41 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt ■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor 1Fastening a Seat Belt 3 WARNING Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash. Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving. Safe Driving Lap belt as low as possible 3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries. 4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body. To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door. 1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants. 1. Move the anchor up and down while holding the release button. Push 2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests Push across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. Continued The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time. After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure. 41 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 42 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt ■ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor 1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling. Small Latch Plate 1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor 3 WARNING Safe Driving Using the seat belt with the detachable anchor unlatched increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash. Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched. Latch Plate 2. Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt to the anchor buckle. Small Latch Plate To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle. Latch Plate Anchor Buckle 3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle. Properly fasten the seat belt the same way you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt. Latch Plate Buckle 42 Small Latch Plate 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 43 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt ■ Advice for Pregnant Women Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen. Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive. To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag: • When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. • When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible. Safe Driving If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips. 1Advice for Pregnant Women Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips. 43 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 44 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection Seat Belt Inspection Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows: Safe Driving • Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. • Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract. Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision. 44 1Seat Belt Inspection 3 WARNING Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed. Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 45 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Airbags Airbag System Components Safe Driving Continued 45 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 46 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components Safe Driving The front, front side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes: a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG. b Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG. d An electronic control unit that, when the power mode is in ON, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information. e Automatic front seat belt tensioners. In addition, the driver's and front passenger's seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened. fA driver's seat position sensor. This sensor determines the optimal force at which the airbag will deploy in a crash. c Two 46 g Weight sensors in the front passenger’s seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be turned off if the weight on the seat is approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child). h Impact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact. i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passenger’s front airbag has been turned off. j An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners. k Safing lA Sensor rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 47 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components ■ Important Facts About Your Airbags What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible. Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection. When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover. Safe Driving Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly. 1Important Facts About Your Airbags Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy. Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates. Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate. 47 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 48 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags Types of Airbags Safe Driving Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: • Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats. • Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs. • Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages. 1Types of Airbags The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON. After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Front Airbags (SRS) The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary restraint system. ■ Housing Locations The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG. 48 1Front Airbags (SRS) During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 49 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) ■ Operation Safe Driving Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate. A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall. ■ How the Front Airbags Work 1How the Front Airbags Work While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest. The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls. Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them. Continued 49 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 50 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) ■ When front airbags should not deploy Safe Driving 50 Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection. ■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. ■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 51 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) ■ Advanced Airbags 1Advanced Airbags If there is a problem with the driver's seat position sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver's seating position) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact. Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the driver's airbag. • Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats. • Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat. • Make sure any objects are positioned properly on Driver’s Seat Position Sensor The front passenger's advanced airbag system has weight sensors. Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger's seat. However, if you do allow a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger's seat, note that the system will automatically turn off the front passenger's airbag if the sensors detect that the child is approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less. For the advanced airbags to work properly: Safe Driving The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants. The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor. the floor. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors. • All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat belts properly. • Do not cover the passenger's side dashboard with a cloth, towel, cover, etc. 2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 56 Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors. 2 Floor Mats P. 603 51 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 52 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuSide Airbags Side Airbags The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact. Safe Driving ■ Housing Locations The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. Housing Location ■ Operation When inflated Side Airbag 52 When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate. 1Side Airbags Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury. Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates. Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 53 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuSide Airbags ■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed. Safe Driving ■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag. 53 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 54 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags Side Curtain Airbags Safe Driving The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes. ■ Housing Locations The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle. 1Side Curtain Airbags To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats. Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags. If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle. Side Curtain Airbag Storage ■ Operation The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact. Deployed Side Curtain Airbag 54 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 55 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators ■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision. Safe Driving Airbag System Indicators If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the driver information interface. ■ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator 1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator ■ When the power mode is set to ON The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly. If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed. Continued 3 WARNING Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem. 55 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 56 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators ■ Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator U.S. Canada ■ When the passenger front airbag off Safe Driving indicator comes on The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger's front airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the weight sensors detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant or small child, on the seat. Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. 1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and no objects on the passenger's seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensor, such as: • An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket. • A child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat-back. • A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger's seat. • The front seat or seat-back is forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it. • An object placed under the front passenger's seat. 2 Child Safety P. 58 Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on. If the front passenger's seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on. 56 If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible. The passenger front airbag off indicator may come on and go off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 57 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAirbagsuAirbag Care Airbag Care You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations: We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit. Safe Driving ■ When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced. 1Airbag Care ■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash. ■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-8889-HONDA-9. 57 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 58 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under. Safe Driving To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle. Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: • An inflating front or side airbag can injure or kill a child sitting in the front seat. • A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver’s ability to safely control the vehicle. • Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat. 58 1Protecting Child Passengers 3 WARNING Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash. Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 59 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers • Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision. • Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash. • Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system. • Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments. • Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly. 3 WARNING Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death. Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked. Safe Driving • Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries. 1Protecting Child Passengers To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way. To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels. 2 Safety Labels P. 74 59 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 60 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safety of Infants and Small Children ■ Protecting Infants Safe Driving An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is at least one year old. ■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position. 1Protecting Infants 3 WARNING Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash. Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front. Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat. When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it. It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system. 2 Airbags P. 45 If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat. 60 Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a forward-facing position. Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions before installation. Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position: The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 61 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Protecting Smaller Children 1Protecting Smaller Children 3 WARNING Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates. If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child. Safe Driving If a child is at least one year old and has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rearward-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat. ■ Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position. Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child. Continued 61 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 62 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Selecting a Child Seat Safe Driving Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety. In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual for proper installation instructions. ■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: • The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. • The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. • The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. 62 1Selecting a Child Seat Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple. LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 63 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat Safe Driving A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in the rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors. 1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks. Marks Continued 63 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 64 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Lower Anchors Safe Driving Rigid Type Lower Anchors Flexible Type 64 2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 65 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Tether Strap Hook Outer positions 1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat Anchor 3 WARNING Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. Safe Driving 3. Slide the seat forward. 4. Put the outer head restraint to it's uppermost position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted. Center position 3. Slide the seat forward. 4. Put the center head restraint to it's lowest position, then route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted. For your child’s safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants. All positions 5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. 6. Slide the seat backward. 7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt. 8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked. 2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 58 Continued 65 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 66 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Safe Driving A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat. 1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. Outer positions 2. Slide the seat forward. 3. Put the outer head restraint to it's uppermost position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted. Center position Tether Strap Hook 2. Slide the seat forward. 3. Put the center head restraint to it's lowest position, then route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted. All positions Anchor 66 4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. 1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 67 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Continued Safe Driving 5. Slide the seat backward. 6. Route the seat belt through the child seat according to the seat manufacturer’s instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks. 7. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor. 8. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and check that the retractor has switched modes by pulling on the webbing. It should not pull out again until it is reset by removing the latch plate from the buckle. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 7-8. 67 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 68 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe Driving 9. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat. 10. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt. 11. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked. 2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 58 68 1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 69 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Adding Security with a Tether A tether anchorage point is provided behind each rear seating position. If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security. Continued Always use a tether for forward facing child seats when using the seat belt or lower anchors. Safe Driving Tether Anchorage Points 1Adding Security with a Tether 69 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 70 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Tether Strap Hook Safe Driving Anchor ■ Using an outer anchor 1. Slide the seat forward. 2. Put the head restraint to it's upper-most position, then route the tether strap through the head restraint legs. Make sure the strap is not twisted. 3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. 4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. 5. Slide the seat backward, then confirm that the tether strap is not loose. ■ Using the center anchor 1. Slide the seat forward. 2. Lower the head restraint to its lowest position. 3. Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted. 4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. 5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. 6. Slide the seat backward, then confirm that the tether strap is not loose. 70 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 71 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children Safety of Larger Children ■ Protecting Larger Children 1Safety of Larger Children ■ Checking Seat Belt Fit When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions. ■ Checklist • Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat? • Does the shoulder belt cross between the child’s neck and arm? • Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs? • Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat. Continued 3 WARNING Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates. If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed. Safe Driving The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front. 71 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 72 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children ■ Booster Seats 1Booster Seats Safe Driving If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer’s recommendations. ■ Protecting Larger Children - Final Checks Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: • Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information in this manual. • Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. • Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. • Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat. ■ Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly. 72 When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly. Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 73 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior. • The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. • The exhaust system may have been damaged. • The vehicle is raised for an oil change. When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below. 1. Select the fresh air mode. 2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting. 3 WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you. Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide. Safe Driving ■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever 1Carbon Monoxide Gas An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine. Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running. 73 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 74 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Safety Labels Label Locations These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully. Safe Driving If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement. Sun Visor U.S. models Canadian models Sun Visor U.S. models only Dashboard U.S. models only Radiator Cap Air Conditioner System U.S. models 74 Canadian models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 75 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Instrument Panel This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving. Indicators ............................................ 76 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages...................... 91 Gauges and Displays Gauges............................................ 104 Driver Information Interface ............. 105 75 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 76 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Indicators Indicator Instrument Panel U.S. Canada (Red) U.S. Canada (Amber) 76 Name On/Blinking Explanation Message • Comes on for a few seconds when • Comes on while driving - Make sure you set the power mode to ON, the parking brake is released. Check the then goes off if the parking brake brake fluid level. 2 What to do when the indicator has been released. comes on while driving P. 629 • Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is • Comes on along with the ABS Parking Brake indicator - Have your vehicle checked released. and Brake by a dealer. • Comes on when the brake fluid System Indicator 2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) level is low. (Red) Comes On P. 629 • Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system. • The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if you drive with the parking brake not fully released. • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly - Have your you set the power mode to ON, vehicle checked by a dealer. then goes off. • With this indicator on, your vehicle still Parking Brake • Comes on if there is a problem has normal braking ability. and Brake with a system related to braking System Indicator other than the conventional brake (Amber) system. U.S. Canada 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 77 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Explanation Message • Comes on when you set the • Readiness codes are part of the on board power mode to ON, and goes off diagnostics for the emissions control when the engine starts, or after systems. 2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 647 several seconds if the engine did • Comes on while driving - Have your not start. If “readiness codes” vehicle checked by a dealer. have not been set, it blinks five • Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe times before it goes off. place where there are no flammable • Comes on if there is a problem objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes with the emissions control system. or more, and wait for it to cool down. • Blinks when a misfire in the Then, take your vehicle to a dealer. engine’s cylinders is detected. Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator Lamp On/Blinking 2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 628 • Comes on when you set the • Comes on while driving - Turn off the power mode to ON, and goes off climate control system and rear defogger Charging System when the engine starts. in order to reduce electricity Indicator • Comes on when the battery is not consumption. 2 If the Charging System Indicator charging. Comes On P. 627 Gear Position Indicator • Indicates the current gear selection. M (sequential • Comes on when the manual mode) Indicator/ sequential shift mode is applied. Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator 2 Shifting P. 460 — 2 Sequential Mode P. 466 — Continued 77 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 78 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Instrument Panel ● The indicated current gear selection blinks if there is a problem with the transmission system. ● Avoid sudden start and acceleration, and stop in a safe place immediately. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. ● All the gear positions may light for several seconds, and go off. ● When all the gear positions light, immediately stop your vehicle in a safe place. Indicators go off if there is no problem. However, even if they go off, take your vehicle to a dealer for inspection. ● Transmission System Indicator ● ● The indicated current gear selection or all the gear positions blink if there is a problem with the transmission system, and the vehicle no longer moves. ● Immediately stop in a safe place. ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. The indicated current gear selection or all the gear positions blink if you cannot select (P due to the transmission system failure. ● The engine can be activated as a temporary measure. 2 Emergency Towing P. 636 2 If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message P. 630 ● ● 78 Set the parking brake when parking. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. Message 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 79 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Low Fuel Indicator • Comes on when the fuel reserve is • Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon running low (approximately 2.5 as possible. U.S. gal./9.5 Liter left). • Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a • Blinks if there is a problem with dealer. the fuel gauge. Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly - Have your you set the power mode to ON, vehicle checked by a dealer. With this then goes off. indicator on, your vehicle still has normal • If it comes on at any other time, braking ability but no anti-lock function. 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 537 there is a problem with the ABS. Instrument Panel Seat Belt Reminder Indicator • Comes on and the beeper sounds • The beeper stops and the indicator goes if you are not wearing a seat belt off when you and the front passenger when you set the power mode to fasten their seat belts. ON. • Stays on after you and/or the front • If the front passenger is not passenger has fastened the seat wearing a seat belt, the indicator belt(s) - A detection error may have comes on a few seconds later. occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle • Blinks while driving if either you checked by a dealer. 2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 38 and/or the front passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals. Message Continued 79 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 80 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking Message Instrument Panel • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly or does not come you set the power mode to ON, on at all - Have your vehicle checked by then goes off. a dealer. Supplemental • Comes on if a problem with any of Restraint System the following is detected: Indicator - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner • Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Auto High-Beam • Comes on when all the operating Indicator conditions of the Auto high-beam are met. ● Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) System Indicator 80 Explanation ● ● Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Blinks when VSA®, or trailer stability assist is active. Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA®, hill start assist, trailer stability assist or brake lighting system. 2 Auto High-Beam P. 174 ● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 477 2 Trailer Stability Assist P. 447 2 Hill start assist system P. 457 ● When Trailer Stability Assist Problem is displayed on the Driver Information Interface, the VSA® does not activate. — 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 81 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Comes on when VSA® OFF switch is pressed. ● Message — — Appears when Normal or Snow mode is selected. Instrument Panel ● Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Explanation 2 VSA® On and Off P. 478 Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF Indicator AWD models ● Comes on when Mud/Sand mode is selected by pressing Intelligent Traction Management System switch. AWD models ● • Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator • * Not available on all models Comes on when VSA® OFF switch is pressed. Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off when the engine starts. Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system. ● Appears when Mud mode is selected. 2 Intelligent Traction Management * P. 475 ● Appears when Sand mode is selected. 2 Intelligent Traction Management * P. 475 ● Appears when Mud or Sand mode is selected. 2 VSA® On and Off P. 478 • Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 629 Continued 81 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 82 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Instrument Panel Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator On/Blinking Message • Comes on for a few seconds when • Comes on while driving - Stop in a you set the power mode to ON, safe place, check tire pressures, and then goes off. inflate the tire(s) if necessary. • Comes on if the tire pressure of any of the tires becomes significantly low. • Blinks for about one minute, and • Blinks and remains on - Have your then stays on if there is a problem vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle with the TPMS with Tire Fill Assist, is fitted with a compact spare, get your or when a compact spare tire is regular tire repaired or replaced and put temporarily installed. back on your vehicle as soon as you can. • Blinks when you operate the turn Turn Signal and signal lever. Hazard Warning • Blink along with all turn signals when you press the hazard Indicators warning button. 82 Explanation • Does not blink or blinks rapidly 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 581, 582 — High Beam Indicator • Comes on when the high beam headlights are on. Lights On Indicator • Comes on when the light switch in • If you set the power mode to a position other than OFF or when ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF while the the switch is set to AUTO and the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds exterior lights come on. when the driver’s door is opened. — — — 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 83 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Fog Light Indicator Explanation Message • Comes on when the fog lights are on. — — • Comes on briefly when you set the • Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set power mode to ON, then goes off. the power mode to VEHICLE OFF*1, then select the ON mode again. • Blinks if the immobilizer system • Repeatedly blinks - The system may be cannot recognize the key Immobilizer malfunctioning. Have your vehicle information. System Indicator checked by a dealer. • Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur. Indicator Security System Alarm Indicator • Comes on briefly when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. • Blinks when the security system alarm has been set. 2 Security System Alarm P. 158 — Instrument Panel Indicator On/Blinking — *1:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before selecting the ON mode. Continued 83 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 84 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Instrument Panel • Comes on along with a beep when a problem is detected. A system message on the driver information interface appears at the same time. System Message Indicator Econ Mode Indicator *1 *1 Intelligent Traction Management Indicator *1:AWD models 84 On/Blinking * Not available on all models • Comes on when the Econ mode is on. Explanation Message • While the indicator is on, press the (home) button, select Warnings, then press the ENTER button to see the message again. • Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter when a system message appears on the driver information interface. Take the appropriate action for the message. • The driver information interface does not return to the normal screen unless the warning is canceled, or the ENTER button is pressed repeatedly. — 2 ECON Mode P. 474 • Comes on when pressing the Intelligent Traction Management button. 2WD models 2 Intelligent Traction Management * P. 475 AWD models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 85 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green) • Comes on when Auto Idle Stop is in operation. The engine automatically shuts off. 2 Auto Idle Stop P. 468 Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. — Auto Idle Stop • Comes on when Auto Idle Stop System Indicator system has been turned off by the (Amber) Auto Idle Stop OFF button. • Blinks if there is a problem with the Auto Idle Stop system. ● ● All-wheel drive (AWD) Indicator * ● Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on if there is a problem with the AWD system. Blinks when the differential temperature is too high. Message — — 2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 469 Instrument Panel ● Explanation • Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. ● Stays on constantly - The engine drives the front wheels only in this state. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. ● Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place, change to (P , and idle the engine until the indicator goes off. If the indicator does not stop blinking, take your vehicle to a dealer. 2 Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System * P. 485 * Not available on all models Continued 85 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 86 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Instrument Panel 86 Name • Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator • (Amber) On/Blinking Explanation Message Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly - Have your you set the power mode to ON, vehicle checked by a dealer. then goes off. Comes on if there is a problem with the LKAS. Lane Keeping • Comes on when you press the Assist System MAIN button. (LKAS) Indicator (Green) 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 518 — 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 87 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message • Comes on when the RDM system shuts itself off. Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator Instrument Panel • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly - Have your you change the power mode to vehicle checked by a dealer. ON, then goes off. • Comes on if there is a problem with the RDM system. • Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 • Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message come back on after you cleaned the area around the camera. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 Continued 87 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 88 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Instrument Panel Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber) Explanation Message • Comes on for a few seconds when • Comes on while driving - Have your you set the power mode to ON, vehicle checked by a dealer. then goes off. • Comes on if there is a problem with ACC. Adaptive Cruise • Comes on when you press the Control (ACC) MAIN button. Indicator (Green) Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator 88 On/Blinking 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 505 • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly without the you change the power mode to CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle checked ON, then goes off. by a dealer. 2 Collision Mitigation Braking • Comes on when you deactivate SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 493 the CMBSTM. A driver information interface message appears for five seconds. • Comes on if there is a problem with the CMBSTM. — 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 89 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking • Comes on when the CMBS system shuts itself off. Explanation TM Message Instrument Panel • Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator • Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 • When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator does not go off even after you clean the sensor cover. 2 Radar Sensor P. 534 Continued 89 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 90 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsu Models with Blind spot information System Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation • Stays on while blind spot information system is turned off. Instrument Panel 90 Blind spot information System Indicator • Comes on when mud, snow, or ice • Comes on while driving - Remove the accumulates in the vicinity of obstacle in the vicinity of the sensor. 2 Blind spot information System * sensor. P. 480 • Comes on if there is a problem with the system. * Not available on all models — • Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Message 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 91 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the ENTER button to see the message again with the system message indicator on. Message (home) button, select Warnings, then press the Condition Explanation • Appears if any door or the tailgate is not completely • Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed. closed. Instrument Panel • Appears when the hood is opened. • Close the hood. • Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. • Appears while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place. 2 If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears P. 627 • Appears when the washer fluid is low *. • Refill the washer fluid. 2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 578 Models with color audio system • Appears while you are customizing the settings and the transmission is in other than (P . * Not available on all models 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 Continued 91 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 92 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message Condition Explanation Instrument Panel • Appears when the temperature of the transmission is starting to get too hot. • The performance of the vehicle may be reduced. • Until the message disappears, reduce your speed and allow the system to cool down. • Appears if the battery charge becomes low. • Charge the battery. • Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Checking the Battery P. 597 the battery. • Appears along with the charging system indicator when the battery is not charging. • Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger to reduce electricity consumption. 2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 627 92 • Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. • Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and Maintenance Past Due follow. 2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface P. 563 • Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets abnormally high. 2 Overheating P. 625 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 93 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message U.S. Condition Models with power tailgate • Appears when there is a problem with the power tailgate system. Explanation • Manually open or close the power tailgate. • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. U.S. • Appears when the starter system has a problem. • As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine. • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. • Appears when the steering wheel is locked. • Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button. Instrument Panel Canada Canada Canada • Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY. — Continued 93 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 94 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message Condition Explanation Instrument Panel • Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the power mode is in ACCESSORY. • Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. • Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the remote inside the vehicle. • Disappears when you bring the remote back inside the vehicle and close the door. 2 ENGINE START/STOP Button P. 165 2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 167 • Appears when the remote battery becomes weak. • Replace the battery as soon as possible. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 599 • Appears if the remote battery is too weak to start the • Bring the remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP engine or the key is not within operating range to button to be touched with. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 620 start the engine. A beeper sounds six times. ● Appears three seconds after the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button, then To Start Engine messages appeared sequentially. ● Unless you bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button, this message does not appear. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 620 • Appears if there is a problem with the cooling system. Models with LED headlights • Appears if there is a problem with the headlights. 94 • Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible. • Appears while driving - The headlights may not be on. When conditions allow you to drive safety, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 95 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message Condition Models with parking sensor system • Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor system. Explanation • Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on or the beeper does not stop even after you clean the area, have the system checked by a dealer. • Check for obstacles near your vehicle to make sure it is safe to park. • Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the smart entry system. • Appears constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Models with parking sensor system Instrument Panel • Appears if there are obstacles around the sensors. • Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the push • Appears constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a button starting system. dealer. ● Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while the vehicle is moving. • Appears if there is a problem with the Auto highbeam. 2 Emergency Engine Stop P. 621 • Manually operate the headlight switch. • If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams. • Appears when the area around the camera is • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe comes back on after you cleaned the area around the place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. camera. • May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.) Continued 95 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 96 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message Condition Explanation • Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with • Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply a vehicle in front of you. the brakes, change lanes, etc.) Instrument Panel 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 493 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 505 • Appears when ACC has been automatically canceled. • You can resume the set speed after the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+ button. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 505 • Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is depressed. • ACC cannot be set. • Appears if the VSA® or traction control function operates while ACC is in operation. • ACC has been automatically canceled. • Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too high for you to set ACC. • Reduce the speed, then set ACC. • Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive vehicle speed. • Reduce the speed, then reset ACC. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 505 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 505 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 505 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 505 • Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too low for • Raise the speed, then set ACC. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 505 you to set ACC. 96 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 97 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message Condition Explanation • Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive low • Raise the speed, then reset ACC. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 505 vehicle speed. Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) • Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 518 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System • Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. 2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 527 • Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected • You can change the setting for the road departure lane. mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only When you selected Warning Only can be selected. - The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane. When you selected Normal or Wide - The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system also steers the vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane. Instrument Panel • Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected lane. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly. Models with color audio system 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 Models with Display Audio 2 Customized Features P. 359 • Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper • Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS. sounds simultaneously. Continued 97 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 98 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message Condition Explanation Instrument Panel • Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS • If any other system indicators come on, such as the button is pressed, but there is a problem with a VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action. 2 Indicators P. 76 system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously if selected by customization. • Appears if the temperature inside the camera is too • Use the climate control system to cool down the high and some driver assist systems cannot be camera. activated. • Disappears - The camera has been cooled down and the systems are activated normally. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 • Appears if the area around the front sensor camera • When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle in is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. and be prevented from a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. detecting a vehicle in front. • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message • May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, does not disappear even after you cleaned the area snow, fog, etc.) around the camera. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 ● ● Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in front. May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.) ● ● When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover. 2 Radar Sensor P. 534 98 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 99 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message Condition ● Appears when the transmission system temperature is too high. The vehicle does not operate properly. Explanation ● ● 2 Starting the Engine P. 452 • Appears when the engine does not restart automatically due to the following reason: • The hood is open. • There is a problem in the system that disables Auto Idle Stop. • Follow the normal procedure to start the engine. • Appears when you attempt to change to another gear position with the transmission in (P and the engine OFF. • To select another gear position while in (P , the engine must be ON. 2 Starting the Engine P. 452 Instrument Panel • Appears when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. Stop in a safe place in (P . Let the engine idle until the message disappears. • Appears when you set the power mode to OFF while • Immediately stop in a safe place, set the parking brake, driving. then restart the engine. If the message disappears, continue driving. ● Appears when you try to change the gear position after the position has automatically been changed to (P with the driver’s door open and the driver’s seat belt unfastened. ● Press the park button if you leave the vehicle. Continued 99 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 100 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message Condition Explanation • Appears if the vehicle is stationary and the • Press the (P button before releasing the brake pedal transmission is put into (N , the driver's seatbelt is when idling, parking or exiting the vehicle. 2 Shift Operation P. 462 unfastened, and the brake pedal is released, as there is a risk that the vehicle might roll unexpectedly. Instrument Panel • Appears when the engine stops without the transmission in (P , and does not restart automatically. • Appears if you open the hood while Auto Idle Stop activates. • Appears when you change to (N , then release the (N button. • Appears when you press and hold (N button for more than two seconds. • If you want to set the power mode to ON, change the gear position to (P . • If you want to start the engine, follow the normal procedure. 2 Starting the Engine P. 452 2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 464 • Disappears when you set the gear position to other than (N . 2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 464 100 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 101 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message Condition Explanation • Appears when car wash mode is not available due to • When transmission is too hot, car wash mode may not hot transmission. be available. Let the engine idle and cool down transmission. 2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N • Appears when you try to change the gear position without depressing the brake pedal. • Depress the brake pedal, then select a shift button. • Appears when you try to change the gear position • Release your foot off the accelerator pedal, then select without releasing your foot off the accelerator pedal. a shift button. Instrument Panel position [car wash mode] P. 464 • Appears when the (P button is pressed while the • Make sure that the vehicle comes to a stop before vehicle is moving. operating the select button. • Appears if you change the gear position to (R while the vehicle is moving forward, or to (D while the vehicle is reversing. • Appears when you set the power mode to ON • Fasten the seat belt properly before you start to drive. 2 Shift Operation P. 462 without fastening the driver’s seat belt. • Appears when you change the gear position after (P has been automatically selected with the driver’s door open, the driver’s seat belt unfastened, then the brake pedal is released. • Appears when you press the (P button but it is not • Depress the brake pedal until this message disappear. engaged due to low ATF temperature. Continued 101 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 102 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message Condition • Appears when depressing the accelerator pedal while the gear position is in (N . Instrument Panel • Appears when Auto Engine Idle Stop Guidance Screens*1 or Auto Idle Stop Display ON*2 has been selected from the customization menu. • Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate for some reason. • Appears when the engine restarts automatically. • Appears when the battery temperature is around 14°F (−10°C) or lower. • Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate because the climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant. • Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate because the engine coolant temperature is too low or high. • Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate because the battery charge level is low. *1:Models with color audio system *2:Models with Display Audio 102 Explanation • Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. When driving, depress the brake pedal and change the gear position. 2 Auto Idle Stop P. 468 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 103 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages Message Condition Explanation • Depress the brake pedal firmly. • Appears when Auto Engine Idle Stop Guidance Screens*1 or Auto Idle Stop Display ON*2 has been selected from the customization menu. • Appears when the system is under the following conditions while Auto Idle Stop activates: • The battery charge level is low. • The battery temperature is around 14°F (−10°C) or lower. • The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant. • The humidity in the interior is high. • The engine restarts automatically in a few seconds. • Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s door while the engine is running by remote engine start. 2 Starting the Engine P. 452 Instrument Panel • Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate because the pressure to the brake pedal is not enough. 2 Remote Engine Start P. 454 *1:Models with color audio system *2:Models with Display Audio 103 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 104 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Gauges and Displays Gauges Gauges include the fuel gauge, temperature gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when the power mode is set to ON. ■ Fuel Gauge Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank. Instrument Panel 104 1Fuel Gauge NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter. The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading. ■ Temperature Gauge Displays the temperature of the engine coolant. 1Temperature Gauge NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal. 2 Overheating P. 625 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 105 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface Driver Information Interface The driver information interface displays the speedometer, tachometer, odometer, trip computer, outside temperature, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information. ■ Speedometer 1Speedometer ■ Tachometer 1Tachometer You can turn on or off the tachometer display. 2 Show Tachometer P. 118 Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute. Continued Instrument Panel You can set the speedometer and the displayed measurements to read in either mph and km/h. 2 Units P. 114 Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h. 105 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 106 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Odometer Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated. Instrument Panel Odometer ■ Outside Temperature 1Outside Temperature Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada). Outside Temperature Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect. Use the driver information interface * or audio/ information screen * to correct the temperature. Models with color audio system 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 Models with Display Audio 2 Customized Features P. 359 106 * Not available on all models The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h). It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 107 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Accessing Content 1Accessing Content Press the (home) button, then press the 3 / 4 button to scroll to the content you want to see. Press the ENTER button to see detailed information. To go back to the previous screen, press the *1 *2 / (back) button. Instrument Panel You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents using the driver information interface. 2 Arrange Apps P. 117 2 Show/Hide Apps P. 116 *1: Models with color audio system *2: Models with Display Audio Continued 107 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 108 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface * P. 111 P. 115 Instrument Panel P. 116 Models with color audio system 3 / 4 Button P. 109 P. 114 * (Home) Button Models with Display Audio 3 / 4 Button P. 113 P. 117 * P. 113 P. 112 (Home) Button * Press 3 or 4 . 108 * Not available on all models P. 111 * P. 114 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 109 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Trip Computer Press the ENTER button to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B. Instrument Panel Trip Computer A Distance Average Fuel Economy Range Models with color audio system Instant Fuel Economy ENTER Trip Computer B ENTER Button Models with Display Audio ENTER Button Continued 109 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 110 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Distance Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips. 1Distance Switch between Distance A and Distance B by pressing the ENTER button. Instrument Panel Resetting distance To reset the Distance, display it and then press and hold the ENTER button until the Distance is reset to 0.0. ■ Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel) Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each Distance in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a Distance is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset. 1Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel) You can change when the average fuel economy is reset. Models with color audio system 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 ■ Instant fuel economy Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km. ■ Range Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy. 110 Models with Display Audio 2 Customized Features P. 359 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 111 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Navigation 1Navigation Models with Display Audio Models with Display Audio Display Audio shows you turn-by-turn directions to your destination. When the navigation system is not providing driving guidance, an image of a compass appears in the driver information interface. You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn display come on or not during the route guidance. 2 Customized Features P. 359 2 Refer to the navigation system Instrument Panel Models with navigation system Turn-By-Turn Driving Directions Turn-by-turn directions will be shown on the driver information interface only when your android phone is connected to Android AutoTM. Compass ■ Warnings 1Warnings 2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 91 The Warnings app is dynamic and will only appear when there are active warnings. If there are no Warnings, this app will not be shown. (Example) Continued 111 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 112 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Maintenance Shows the current condition of the tire pressure and the remaining oil life. Instrument Panel ■ Tire Pressure Shows the tire pressure of each tire. 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist P. 486 ■ Oil Life Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 561 112 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 113 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ AWD Torque * The indicators on the display show the amount of torque being transferred to the right front, left front, right rear, and left rear wheels. ■ Phone * Instrument Panel 2 Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System * P. 485 Shows the current phone information. 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 381 * Not available on all models Continued 113 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 114 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Units Enables you to set the speedometer and the displayed measurements to read in either mph or km/h. Instrument Panel Press and hold the ENTER button. Each time you do this, the unit will change from mph to km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will appear for a few seconds. ■ Now Playing * Shows the current audio information. 2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 233 114 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 115 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Audio Source * Shows the current audio source. 2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 233 Instrument Panel (Example) * Not available on all models Continued 115 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 116 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Show/Hide Apps Instrument Panel You can show or hide the meter contents. Select the content you wish to show or hide, Shown then press the ENTER button. u Repeat it if you want to show or hide more than one app. Press ENTER Hidden 116 * Not available on all models 1Show/Hide Apps You cannot hide apps with the side. icon on the right Selecting Default All in Vehicle Customization does not restore these settings to their original state. Models with Display Audio You can also add the Android Auto, Apple CarPlay, Sirius XM *, My Honda Music, USB, AM, FM, Bluetooth Audio, Social Playlist and AUX Input apps. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 117 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Settings Change the settings to your liking. 1Arrange Apps Instrument Panel ■ Arrange Apps You can change the order of the apps on the home screen. 1. Press the 3 / 4 button to select Arrange Apps, then press the ENTER button. 2. Press the 3 / 4 button to select the icon you want to move, then press the ENTER button. Selecting Default All in Vehicle Customization does not restore these settings to their original state. 3. Press the 3 / 4 button repeatedly to move the icon to your desired position, then press the ENTER button. Continued 117 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 118 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Show Tachometer You can show or hide the tachometer. Press the 3 / 4 button to select Show Tachometer, then press the ENTER button. u The tachometer appears when the check box is checked. Instrument Panel 118 1Show Tachometer Selecting Default All in Vehicle Customization does not restore these settings to their original state. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 119 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface Models with color audio system 1Vehicle Customization ■ Vehicle Customization Use the driver information interface to customize certain vehicle features. Driver Information Interface: Goes to Settings. 3 / 4 Button Scroll through the menu or items. ENTER Button Enters the selected item. Button Goes back to the previous screen. Button Goes to home screen. Continued Change to (P before you attempt to change a customized setting. Instrument Panel How to customize First, make sure the vehicle is at a complete stop and that the power mode is set to ON. Next, press the (home) button, then press the 3 / 4 button to select Settings. Finally, press the ENTER button. To customize other features, press the 3 / 4 button. 2 List of customizable options P. 122 2 Example of how to customize a setting P. 126 119 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 120 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Customization flow Press the (home) button. Settings ENTER 3 4 Arrange Apps P. 117 Show Tachometer P. 118 Instrument Panel Vehicle Customization ENTER Meter Setup ENTER 3 4 Language Selection Adjust Outside Temp. Display “Trip A” Reset Timing “Trip B” Reset Timing 3 4 Adjust Alarm Volume Reverse Alert Tone Fuel Efficiency Backlight Auto Engine Idle Stop Guidance Screens Door Unlock Mode Keyless Access Setup ENTER 3 4 Keyless Access Beep Remote Start System ON/OFF 3 4 Driver Assist System Setup Keyless Access Light Flash Forward Collision Warning Distance ENTER 3 4 ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Road Departure Mitigation Setting Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep ENTER 120 3 4 3 4 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 121 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface 3 4 Interior Light Dimming Time Lighting Setup ENTER Auto Light Sensitivity Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON 3 4 Instrument Panel Headlight Auto OFF Timer 3 4 Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock Door Setup ENTER 3 4 Key And Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back ENTER 3 4 3 4 Security Relock Timer Default All 3 4 Exit Continued 121 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 122 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ List of customizable options Setup Group Instrument Panel Meter Setup Customizable Features Selectable settings Language Selection Changes the displayed language. Adjust Outside Temp. Display Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees. “Trip A” Reset Timing Changes the setting of how the distance and average fuel economy of trip computer A is reset. When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1 “Trip B” Reset Timing Changes the setting of how the distance and average fuel economy of trip computer B is reset. When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1 Adjust Alarm Volume Changes the volume setting for buzzers, warnings, turn signals, and other alerting systems. High/Mid*1/Low Reverse Alert Tone Causes the beeper to sound once when the gear position is changed to (R . ON*1/OFF Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON*1/OFF Auto Engine Idle Stop Guidance Screens Turns the engine idle-stop guidance displayed in the meter display on and off during the auto engine idlestop system is in operation. ON/OFF*1 *1:Default Setting 122 Description English*1/Français/Español −5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.) −3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C (Canada) 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 123 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface Setup Group Driver Assist System Setup Description Selectable settings Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s door handle. Driver’s Door Only*1/All Doors Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/ lock the doors. ON*1/OFF Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors. ON*1/OFF Remote Start System ON/OFF Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON*1/OFF Forward Collision Warning Distance Changes the distance at which CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/Short ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC range. ON/OFF*1 Road Departure Mitigation Setting Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system. Normal*1/Wide/Warning Only Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended. ON/OFF*1 Instrument Panel Keyless Access Setup Customizable Features Continued 123 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 124 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface Setup Group Instrument Panel Lighting Setup Customizable Features Selectable settings Interior Light Dimming Time Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors. 60sec/30sec*1/15sec Headlight Auto OFF Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver’s door. 60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position. Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON Changes the settings for the wiper operation when the headlights automatically come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position. ON*1/OFF *1:Default Setting 124 Description 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 125 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface Setup Group Description Selectable settings Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically lock. With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift From P/OFF Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically unlock. All Doors When Driver’s Door Opens*1/All Doors When Shifted To Park/All Doors When Ignition Switched OFF/OFF Key And Remote Unlock Mode Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock on the first operation of the remote or built-in key. Driver Door*1/All Doors Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK - The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. ON*1/OFF Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening a door. 90sec/60sec/30sec*1 Cancels customized changes you have made or restores them to their default setting. Cancel/Set Default All — Instrument Panel Door Setup Customizable Features *1:Default Setting Continued 125 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 126 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface ■ Example of how to customize a setting Instrument Panel Below are steps that explain how to change the reset timing for trip A from the default setting (manual) so that it resets automatically when the vehicle is fully refueled. 1. Press the (home) button and then the 3 / 4 button to select Settings, then press the ENTER button. 2. Press the 3 / 4 button to select Vehicle Customization, then press the ENTER button. 126 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 127 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface 3. Press the 3 / 4 button to select Meter Setup, then press the ENTER button. u Language Selection appears first in the display. Instrument Panel 4. Press the 3 / 4 button to select “Trip A” Reset Timing, then press the ENTER button. u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select When Fully Refueled, IGN OFF, Manually Reset, or Exit. 5. Press the 3 / 4 button to select When Fully Refueled, then press the ENTER button. u The SETUP “When Fully Refueled” screen appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen. Continued 127 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 128 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface Instrument Panel 128 6. Press the 3 / 4 button until Exit appears on the display, then press the ENTER button. 7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the Vehicle Customization screen, then press the (home) or (back) button to return to the home screen. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 129 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Controls This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving. Clock .................................................. 130 Locking and Unlocking the Doors Key Types and Functions .................. 133 Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength ..... 135 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside .......................................... 136 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ............................................. 144 Childproof Door Locks ..................... 146 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 147 Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 148 Security System ................................ 158 Opening and Closing the Windows..... 161 * Not available on all models Moonroof * ........................................ 164 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 165 Turn Signals ..................................... 168 Light Switches.................................. 169 Fog Lights * ...................................... 172 Daytime Running Lights ................... 173 Auto High-Beam .............................. 174 Wipers and Washers ........................ 177 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button ........................................... 180 Brightness Control ........................... 182 Driving Position Memory System * .... 183 Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 185 Adjusting the Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 186 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 187 Adjusting the Seats Front Seats ...................................... 188 Rear Seats........................................ 192 Armrest ........................................... 197 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items Interior Lights .................................. 198 Interior Convenience Items .............. 201 Climate Control System ................... 217 129 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 130 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Clock Adjusting the Clock Models without navigation system 1Clock You can adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen, with the power mode in ON. ■ Adjusting the Time Models with navigation system The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted. Models with color audio system ■ Using the MENU/CLOCK button Controls 130 1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button for two seconds. 2. Select Adjust Clock, then press . 3. Rotate to adjust the hours. 4. Press to switch to minute adjustment. 5. Rotate to adjust the minutes. 6. Press to switch to Set. 7. Press to complete clock adjustment. 1Using the MENU/CLOCK button Models with color audio system These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter. You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock. 2 Customized Features P. 352 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 131 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuClockuAdjusting the Clock Models with Display Audio ■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/ information screen 1. Select , then select Settings. 2. Select System. 3. Select Date & Time. 4. Select Set Date & Time. 5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF. Models with Display Audio You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock displayed on the upper right corner of the display or the Clock icon on the home screen. 1. Touch the clock on the display. The clock screen of the select face-type appears. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Date & Time Settings. 4. Select Set Date & Time. 5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF. 6. Select Set Date or Set Time. 7. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by selecting 3 / 4 . 8. Select Save to set the time. Controls To adjust time: 6. Select Set Time. 7. Selecting 3 / 4 . u AM/PM icon can be switched to each other either by selecting 3 / 4 , or by directly touching the icon. u When you customize the clock display to 24 hour clock, AM/PM icon is not displayed. 1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock. 2 Customized Features P. 359 2 Customized Features P. 359 8. Select Save to set the time. Continued 131 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 132 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuClockuAdjusting the Clock To adjust date: 6. Select Set Date. 7. Selecting 3 / 4 . 8. Select Save to set the date. Controls 132 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 133 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Locking and Unlocking the Doors Key Types and Functions This vehicle comes with the following keys: Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and Smart Entry Remote to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate. You can also use the remote transmitter to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate. All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft. 2 Immobilizer System P. 158 Built-in Key The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled. To remove the built-in key, slide the release knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall the built-in key, push the built-in key into the smart entry remote until it clicks. Continued Controls Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the keys: • Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in locations with high temperature or high humidity. • Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. • Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand. • Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the battery. ■ Built-in Key Release Knob 1Key Types and Functions If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer. You can remotely start the engine using the smart entry remote. 2 Remote Engine Start P. 454 133 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 134 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions ■ Key Number Tag 1Key Number Tag Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key. Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer. If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer. Controls 134 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 135 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/ unlocking the doors and tailgate, or to start the engine. In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors and tailgate, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: • Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. • You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. • A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote. 1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength Communication between the smart entry remote and the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use. The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers. Controls 135 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 136 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System When you carry the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate. You can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle or tailgate outer handle. 1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior lights come on when you unlock the doors and tailgate. No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds. Doors and tailgate relocked: The lights go off immediately. 2 Interior Lights P. 198 Controls 1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the smart entry system, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock. You can lock or unlock doors using the smart entry system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). 136 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 137 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Locking the doors and tailgate Door Lock Button 1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System Press the door lock button on a front door or the tailgate. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock; and the security system sets. • Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you. • Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, • • Door Lock Button • • • Continued Controls • you can lock/unlock the doors and tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range. The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the smart entry remote is within range. If you grip a door handle wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors. After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds during which you can pull the door handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock. The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle. Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart entry remote if it is above or below the outside handle. The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too close to the door and door glass. 137 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 138 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Unlocking the doors and tailgate 1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System Grab the driver’s door handle: u The driver’s door unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice. Grab the front passenger’s door handle: u All doors and the tailgate unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice. Controls Press the tailgate outer handle: u The tailgate unlocks and opens. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice. 2 Using the Tailgate Outer Handle P. 153 Outer Handle 138 * Not available on all models The light flash, beeper, and unlock settings can be customized using the audio/information screen. Models without Display Audio 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 Models with Display Audio 2 Customized Features P. 359 You can also unlock and open with the power tailgate *. 2 Using the Tailgate Outer Handle P. 153 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 139 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®) * 1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the vehicle. u The beeper sounds; the auto lock function will be activated. 2. Carry the smart entry remote beyond about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all doors and tailgate will then lock. * Not available on all models Continued The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the audio/information screen. Turning ON auto lock function using the audio/ information screen, shall only activate the function in remote transmitter that was used to unlock the driver's door. 2 Customized Features P. 359 After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the smart entry remote will continue to flash until the doors are locked. Controls The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m) 1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®) * When you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the smart entry remote, the doors will automatically lock. The auto lock function activates when all doors and tailgate are closed, and the smart entry remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle. Exit vehicle while carrying smart entry remote and close door(s). When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds. When you open a door after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be delayed until all doors and tailgate are closed. Under the following circumstances, the auto-lock function will not activate: • The remote is inside the vehicle. uThe buzzer will not sound. • The remote is taken out of its operational range before all the doors are closed. uThe buzzer will sound. 139 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 140 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside To temporarily deactivate the function: 1. Set the power mode to OFF. 2. Open the driver's door. 3. Using the master door lock switch, operate the lock as follows: Lock  Unlock  Lock  Unlock. u The beeper sounds and the function is deactivated. Controls To restore the function: • Set the power mode to ON. • Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock function. • With the smart entry remote on you, move out of the auto lock function operation range. • Open any door. 1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®) * Models with power tailgate If equipped, the user must wait until the power tailgate fully closes before the auto lock function will be activated. The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met. • The smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. • A door or the hood is not closed. • The power mode is set to any mode other than OFF. • The smart entry remote is not located within a radius of about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors. Auto lock function operation stop beeper After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases. • The smart entry remote is put inside the vehicle through a window. • You are located too close to the vehicle. • The smart entry remote is put inside the tailgate. If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the smart entry remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once. 140 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 141 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Using the Remote Transmitter ■ Locking the doors and tailgate LED Unlock Button 1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®) * Lock Button 1Using the Remote Transmitter If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock. You can change the relock timer setting. Models without Display Audio 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 ■ Unlocking the doors and tailgate Press the unlock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks. Twice: u The remaining doors and tailgate unlock. Controls Press the lock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors and tailgate lock, and the security system sets. Twice (within five seconds after the first push): u The beeper sounds and verifies the security system is set. In the case that the smart entry remote is out of operating range when you close a door or the boot, a beeper will sound to indicate that the auto lock function has been canceled. Models with Display Audio 2 Customized Features P. 359 You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings. The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open. If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 599 * Not available on all models Continued 141 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 142 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside 1Using the Remote Transmitter You can customize the door unlock mode setting. Models without Display Audio 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 Models with Display Audio 2 Customized Features P. 359 ■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key Controls If the lock or unlock button of the smart entry remote does not work, use the key instead. Fully insert the key and turn it. Lock 1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate. You can customize the door unlock mode setting. Models without Display Audio 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 Models with Display Audio Unlock 142 2 Customized Features P. 359 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 143 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using the key, you can lock the door without it. ■ Locking the front doors Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door. ■ Lockout prevention system The doors and tailgate cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle. Controls ■ Locking the rear doors Push the lock tab forward and close the door. 1Locking a Door Without Using a Key 143 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 144 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ■ Using the Lock Tab To Lock Lock Tab 1Using the Lock Tab ■ Locking a door Push the lock tab forward. ■ Unlocking a door To Unlock Controls 144 Pull the lock tab rearward. When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, all of the other doors and the tailgate lock at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 145 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ■ Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle Inner Handle 1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle Pull the front door inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one motion. The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion. Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided. 2 Childproof Door Locks P. 146 Controls Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors. To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door. u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to OFF using the driver information interface or audio/information screen *. Models without Display Audio 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 Models with Display Audio 2 Customized Features P. 359 * Not available on all models Continued 145 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 146 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks ■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate. Master Door Lock Switch 1Using the Master Door Lock Switch When you lock/unlock either of the front doors using the master door lock switch, all the other doors and the tailgate lock/unlock at the same time. To Lock To Unlock Controls Childproof Door Locks The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. ■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door. ■ When opening the door Open the door using the outside door handle. Unlock Lock 146 1Childproof Door Locks To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 147 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met. ■ Auto Door Locking ■ Drive lock mode All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h). 1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Models without Display Audio You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the driver information interface. 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 Models with Display Audio ■ Auto Door Unlocking Controls ■ Driver’s door open mode All doors and tailgate unlock when the driver’s door is opened. You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the audio/ information screen. 2 Customized Features P. 359 147 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 148 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Opening and Closing the Tailgate Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it. Models without power tailgate • Open the tailgate all the way. u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight. • Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close. All models Controls Keep the tailgate closed while driving to: u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle. 2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 73 1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate 3 WARNING Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate that is being opened or closed can be seriously injured. Make sure that all people are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it. Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the tailgate. When you are storing or picking up cargo from the cargo area, or by using a forward and back kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access *, while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned. Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash. 148 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 149 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuPrecautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate Models with power tailgate The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate button in the driver side control panel, pressing the button on the tailgate, or by raising and lowering your foot under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access *. The power tailgate can be opened/closed when the transmission is in (P . 1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate Models with power tailgate 3 WARNING Closing a power tailgate while anyone is in the path of the tailgate can cause serious injury. NOTICE Controls Make sure everyone is clear before closing the power tailgate. Do not push or pull on the power tailgate when it is being automatically opened or closed. Forcibly opening or closing the power tailgate while in operation can deform the tailgate frame. When operating the power tailgate, make sure there is enough space around your vehicle. People near the tailgate may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits or closes on their heads. Be especially cautious if children are around. The power tailgate may not open or close under the following conditions: • You start the engine while the tailgate is automatically opening or closing. • The vehicle is parked on a steep hill. • The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind. • The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice. * Not available on all models 149 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 150 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate * Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate * ■ Using the Hands Free Access * Use a forward and back kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper to open or close the power tailgate while carrying the smart entry remote. u Some exterior lights flash twice and a beeper sounds once, then the tailgate begins to move. 1Using the Hands Free Access * During rain or in other instances when the vehicle becomes wet, the sensor may not properly detect your foot motion. Controls When performing work on or around the rear section of the vehicle, you may inadvertently open or close the tailgate. To prevent this from happening, select Customized Features on the audio/information screen and then select OFF for the feature. 2 Customized Features P. 359 If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the power tailgate does not open or close. 1 sec. This function will not operate if you don't have the smart entry remote on you. Please make sure you have the smart entry remote on you. The duration of the kicking motion should be approximately one second. 150 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 151 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate * ■ Using the Remote Transmitter 1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate * Press the power tailgate button for more than one second to operate when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper sounds. If you press the button again while the power tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction. ■ Customizing when to open the tailgate Anytime: The power tailgate unlocks and opens at the same time. This is the default setting. When Unlocked: The tailgate opens when all doors are unlocked. 2 Customized Features P. 359 If you replace the battery or the power tailgate fuse while the tailgate is open, the power tailgate may be disabled. The power tailgate resumes once you manually close the tailgate. Installing aftermarket components other than genuine Honda accessories on the power tailgate may prevent it from fully opening or closing. Controls Power Tailgate Button If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are locked, the power tailgate locks automatically. Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you get your cargo in and out. Make sure the power tailgate is fully closed before you start the vehicle. The beeper sounds when you start driving while the power tailgate is still open, or closing. * Not available on all models Continued 151 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 152 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate * ■ Using the Power Tailgate Button To open or close the power tailgate, press the power tailgate button for about one second. u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper sounds. If you press the button again while the power tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction. Controls Power Tailgate Button 1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate * If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the direction. The beeper sounds three times. The auto reverse function stops sensing when the tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully closes. Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you touch either sensor when you are trying to close the tailgate. Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the power tailgate closing feature malfunctions. 152 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 153 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate * ■ Using the Tailgate Outer Handle 1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate * If you press the outer handle of the tailgate for no longer than one second, the tailgate opens automatically. u The beeper sounds. u If you want to open the tailgate manually, press the button for more than one second. 2 Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 148 Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range. You can change the power tailgate operation setting on and off. 2 Customized Features P. 359 Controls Outer Handle Do not leave the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry remote in the cargo area before closing the tailgate. If you are carrying the smart entry remote, you do not have to unlock the tailgate before opening it. To close the tailgate, press the outer handle again while the tailgate is opening. If you press the outer handle again while the power tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction. * Not available on all models Continued 153 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 154 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate * ■ Using the Tailgate Inner Button Press the button on the tailgate to close the power tailgate. u The beeper sounds. If you press the button again while the power tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction. Controls 154 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 155 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate * ■ Auto-Closer If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically. 1Auto-Closer The auto-closer feature does not activate if you press the tailgate outer handle while the power tailgate is closing. Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power tailgate is latching. ■ Power Tailgate Fall Detection Automatically lowers the power tailgate when there is a possibility that the fully opened power tailgate can fall down by its own weight (for example, by snow on the tailgate). The beeper sounds while the power tailgate lowers. Controls Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you manually close the tailgate and let it latch automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself. 1Power Tailgate Fall Detection If you try to manually close the power tailgate immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate fall detection may be activated. Once the power tailgate fall detection activates, wait until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away from the power tailgate when it is in motion. If the power tailgate fall detection constantly activates, consult at a dealer. 155 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 156 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate Opening/Closing the Tailgate ■ Using the Tailgate Outer Handle When all the doors are unlocked or press the tailgate unlock button on the remote transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked. Press the tailgate outer handle and lift open the tailgate. Controls Outer Handle If you are carrying the smart entry remote, you do not have to unlock the tailgate before opening it. To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle, pull the tailgate down, and push it closed from outside. Inner Handle 156 1Using the Tailgate Outer Handle Do not leave the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry remote in the cargo area before closing the tailgate. Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 157 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate ■ Using the Remote Transmitter Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the tailgate. 1Using the Remote Transmitter If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using the remote transmitter or smart entry remote, when closing, the tailgate locks automatically. Tailgate Unlock Button Controls 157 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 158 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Security System Immobilizer System The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key. Controls Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button: • Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/ STOP button. • Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. • Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ENGINE START/STOP button. • Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic. 1Immobilizer System NOTICE Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended. Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable. Security System Alarm The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system. However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON. 158 1Security System Alarm Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable. The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 159 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm ■ When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently, and some exterior lights flash. 1Security System Alarm ■ To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated. ■ Setting the security system alarm If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system. Controls The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: • The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). • The hood is closed. • All doors and the tailgate are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system. Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when: • Unlocking the door with the lock tab. • Opening the hood with the hood release. ■ When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds. ■ To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter or smart entry system, or when the power mode is set to ON. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time. Continued 159 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 160 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm ■ Panic Mode ■ The panic button on the remote Panic Button Controls 160 transmitter If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: • The horn sounds. • Some exterior lights flash. ■ Canceling panic mode Press any button on the remote transmitter, or set the power mode to ON. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 161 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Opening and Closing the Windows Opening/Closing the Power Windows The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat. ■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function ON OFF Power Window Lock Button 3 WARNING Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury. Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them. The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Opening either front door cancels this function. ■ Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction. ■ Automatic operation To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly. The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Controls When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle. 1Opening/Closing the Power Windows The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch. Indicator Driver’s Window Switch Front Passenger’s Window Switch The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly. Continued 161 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 162 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows ■ Opening/Closing the Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up. Close Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position. Open Controls ■ Opening the Windows and the Moonroof * with the Remote To open: Press the unlock button, and then within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it. Unlock Button 162 * Not available on all models If the windows and moonroof * stop midway, repeat the procedure. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 163 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows ■ Opening/Closing the Windows and the Moonroof * with the Key To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there. Close Open Controls To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the lock direction and hold it there. Release the key to stop the windows/ moonroof * at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation. * Not available on all models 163 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 164 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Moonroof * Opening and Closing the Moonroof You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof. ■ Using the Moonroof Switch ■ Automatic operation To open: Pull the switch back firmly. To close: Push the switch forward firmly. Open Controls The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, push the switch briefly. Close Tilt Opening or closing the moonroof on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury. Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it. NOTICE ■ Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to OFF (LOCK). Opening either front door cancels this function. To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release. * Not available on all models 3 WARNING Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor. ■ Tilting the moonroof up 164 1Opening and Closing the Moonroof When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof. 2 Opening the Windows and the Moonroof * with the Remote P. 162 2 Opening/Closing the Windows and the Moonroof * with the Key P. 163 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 165 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel ENGINE START/STOP Button ■ Changing the Power Mode 1ENGINE START/STOP Button VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) The button is off. The steering wheel is locked*1. The power to all electrical components is turned off. ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range You can start the engine when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. Operating Range Controls ACCESSORY The button blinks (in red). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position. If the battery of the smart entry remote is getting low, the engine may not start when you push the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not start, refer to the following link. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 620 The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle. ON The button blinks (in red). All electrical components can be used. ON mode: The ENGINE START/STOP button is on (in red), if the engine is running. Without pressing the brake pedal Press the button. Canadian models *1: Canadian models If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/ STOP button while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change. Continued 165 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 166 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button ■ Automatic Power Off If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery. Canadian models Controls When in this mode: The steering wheel does not lock. You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry system. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). ■ Power Mode Reminder If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning beeper sounds. 166 1ENGINE START/STOP Button Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 167 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button ■ Smart Entry Remote Reminder Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/ or outside the vehicle to remind you that the smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the buzzer continues even after the remote is put back inside, place it to be within its operational range. ■ When the power mode is in ACCESSORY If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a warning buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle. When the smart entry remote is within the system’s operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the warning function cancels. If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button. Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer. Controls ■ When the power mode is in ON If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed, a warning buzzer sounds from both inside and outside the vehicle. A warning message on the driver information interface notifies the driver inside that the remote is outside of the vehicle. 1Smart Entry Remote Reminder Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the system’s operational range. 167 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 168 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals Turn Signals Right Turn The turn signals can be used when the power mode is in ON. ■ One-touch turn signal Left Turn Controls 168 When you lightly push up or down and release the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals and turn signal indicator blink three times. This feature can be used when signaling for a lane change. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 169 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches Light Switches ■ Manual Operation U.S. models High Beams Canadian models Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting. ■ High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click. ■ Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams. ■ Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it. When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on. 2 Lights On Indicator P. 82 Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge. Models without automatic headlight adjusting system If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Canadian models ■ Lights off Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened. Turn the lever to OFF either when: • The transmission is in (P . • The parking brake is applied. To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights come on automatically when: • The transmission is taken out of (P and the parking brake is released. • The vehicle starts to move. Continued Controls Flashing the high beams Low Beams 1Light Switches Models with automatic headlight adjusting system Your vehicle is equipped with the automatic headlight adjusting system that automatically adjusts the vertical angle of the high/low beam headlights. If you find a significant change in the vertical angle of the headlights, there may be a problem with the system. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 169 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 170 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches ■ Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) U.S. models 1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) Automatic lighting control can be used when the power mode is in ON. We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities. When the light switch is in AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness. The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly. Controls Models with automatic intermittent wipers Canadian models The headlights come on when you unlock a door in dark areas with the headlight switch in AUTO. u Once you lock the door, the headlights will go off. Light Sensor Models without Automatic Intermittent Wipers Light Sensor 170 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 171 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches 1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows: Setting Max High Mid Low Min The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at Bright Dark 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 Models with Display Audio Controls Models without Display Audio 2 Customized Features P. 359 ■ Headlight Integration with Wipers 1Headlight Integration with Wipers The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped. ■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the driver’s door. If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position). Continued This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on. At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps. 1Automatic Lighting Off Feature You can change the headlight auto off timer setting. Models without Display Audio 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 Models with Display Audio 2 Customized Features P. 359 171 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 172 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights * The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime. Fog Lights * When the parking lights or the headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights. Controls Fog Light Switch 172 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 173 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights Daytime Running Lights The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met: • The power mode is in ON. • The headlight switch is AUTO or OFF. • The parking brake is released. The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) will turn off the daytime running lights. Controls The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside. 173 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 174 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam Auto High-Beam The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation. Front Sensor Camera 1Auto High-Beam The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary. If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually. Controls The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle. ■ How to Use the Auto High-Beam When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator comes on and the auto high-beam is activated. • The power mode is in ON. Auto High-Beam • The light switch is in AUTO. Indicator • The lever is in the low beam position. • The headlights have been automatically activated. • It is dark outside the vehicle. Light Switch If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on. • Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving. 174 Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 For the auto high-beam to work properly: • Do not place an object that reflects light on the dashboard. • Keep the windshield around the camera clean. • When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens. • Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area around the camera. • Do not touch the camera lens. If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 175 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam ■ Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam 1How to Use the Auto High-Beam When auto-high beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions. Switching to low beam: All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on. ● Your vehicle speed is 45mph (72 km/h) or more. ● There are no preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on. ● There are few street lights on the road ahead. One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on. ● Your vehicle speed is 30 mph (48 km/h) or less. ● There is a preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on. ● There are many street lights on the road ahead. ■ Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto highbeam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated. Using the lever: Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving. u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on. Using the light switch: Turn the light switch to . u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on. Continued • The brightness of the lights from the preceding or oncoming vehicle is intense or poor. • Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow, fog, windshield frost, etc.). • Surrounding light sources, such as street lights, • • • • • • • electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating the road ahead. The brightness level of the road ahead constantly changes. The road is bumpy or has many curves. A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or oncoming direction. Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear. A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle. The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under roadside trees or behind median barriers. The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle. Controls Switching to high beam: In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually. The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beam when: • Windshield wipers are operating. • The camera has been detected a dense fog. 175 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 176 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam ■ How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam Controls You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or on, set the power mode to ON, then carry out the following procedures while the vehicle is stationary. To turn the system off: AUTO Position With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks twice, release the lever. To turn the system on: With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks once, release the lever. 1How to Use the Auto High-Beam If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears: • Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera. • Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera. If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield or Auto HighBeam Cannot Operate: Clean Windshield message appears: • Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system does not operate until you turn the system on. Park in a safe place before turning the system off or on. 176 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 177 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers Wipers and Washers ■ Windshield Wipers/Washers 1Wipers and Washers The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the power mode is in ON. ■ MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever. Pull to use washer. MIST OFF HI) Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings. ■ Adjusting wiper operation * Turn the adjustment ring to adjust wiper operation. Lower speed, fewer sweeps INT*1/AUTO*2 LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged. The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal. Controls Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring * ■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT*1/AUTO*2, LO, NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged. Models with intermittent time adjustment ring If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest delay setting (+) and the LO setting become the same. Higher speed, more sweeps NOTICE ■ Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop. In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defogger or heated windshield * to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on. *1: Models with manual intermittent operation *2: Models with automatic intermittent operation * Not available on all models Continued 177 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 178 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers ■ Automatic Intermittent Wipers * 1Wipers and Washers When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode. Controls The wipers operate intermittently, at low speed, or at high speed and stops in accordance with the amount of rainfall the rainfall sensor detects. ■ Auto sensitivity adjustment If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then remove the obstacle. 1Automatic Intermittent Wipers * The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below. Rainfall Sensor When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor (using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will operate in accordance with your preference. Sensor sensitivity Low sensitivity NOTICE High sensitivity 178 * Not available on all models AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system: • Cleaning the windshield • Driving through a car wash • No rain present 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 179 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers ■ Rear Wiper/Washer The rear wiper and washer can be used when the power mode is in ON. ■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain. ON OFF Washer Controls INT: Intermittent ■ Washer ( ) Sprays on the rear window while you rotate the switch to this position. Hold it to activate the rear wiper and to spray the washer. Once released, the washer spray will stop and the rear wiper will return to its selected switch setting after a few more sweeps. ■ Operating in reverse When you shift the transmission to (R with the windshield wiper activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off. Front Wiper Operation Rear Wiper Operation INT (Intermittent) Intermittent LO (Low speed wipe) HI (High speed wipe) Continuous 179 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 180 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the power mode is in ON. Models with heated door mirror Controls The rear defogger and heated door mirrors automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below, they do not automatically switch off. Models without heated door mirror The rear defogger automatically switches off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below, it does not automatically switch off. 180 * Not available on all models 1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long time while the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine. Models with heated door mirror When the power mode is set to ON and the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 181 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluHeated Windshield Button Canadian models Heated Windshield Button Press the heated windshield button to deice the windshield when the power mode is in ON. 1Heated Windshield Button This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been deiced. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine. Controls When the outside temperate is below 39°F (4°C), the heated windshield may automatically activate. The system deactivates itself once the outside temperate reaches 43°F (6°C). 181 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 182 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control Brightness Control (+ Button (- Button When the power mode is in ON, you can use the (+ or (- button to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Press the (+ button. Dim: Press the (- button. Controls You will hear a beeper when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. Several seconds after you have adjusted the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen. ■ Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the display while you are adjusting it. 182 1Brightness Control Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on whether the exterior lights are on or off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are on. When it is bright outside and the headlight integration with the wiper is activated, the instrument panel brightness does not change. To cancel the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on, press the (+ button until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds. The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 183 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System * Driving Position Memory System * You can store two driver's seat (except for power lumbar) and outside mirrors position with the driving position memory system. When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter, or smart entry system, door mirrors adjust to one of the two preset positions and the seat adjusts to retracted positions of one of the two preset positions automatically. The seat will move to the stored position when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY. DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2 * Not available on all models The driver’s seat moves rearward depending on the set seating position once you • Stop the vehicle. • Put the transmission in (P . • Turn the engine off. • Then open the driver’s door. Once the power mode is in the ACCESSORY position, the driver’s seat moves to the DRIVER 1 or 2 preset position. Continued Using the audio/information screen, you can disable the automatic seat and door mirrors adjustment function. 2 Customized Features P. 359 The driver’s seat easy exit feature can be turned ON/ OFF. 2 Customized Features P. 359 System Operation The system will not operate if: • The vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h). • Either memory position button is pressed while the seat is in motion. • The seat position is adjusted while in operation. • The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear. Controls When you enter the vehicle, the driver information interface briefly shows you which remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle. • DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1. • DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2. 1Driving Position Memory System * 183 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 184 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System * ■ Storing a Position in Memory Memory Button 1 Controls SET Button Memory Button 2 1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the driver’s seat and the door mirrors to the desired position. 2. Press the SET button. u You will hear a beep, and the memory button indicator light will blink. 3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2 within five seconds of pressing the SET button. u You will hear two beeps, and the indicator light on the button you pressed stays on once the seat and the outside mirror positions have been memorized. ■ Recalling the Stored Position Memory Buttons 1. Put the transmission into (P . 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2 ). u You will hear a beep, and the indicator light will blink. The seat and the door mirrors will automatically move to the memorized positions. When it has finished moving, you will hear the beep, and the indicator light stays on. 184 1Storing a Position in Memory After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when: • You do not press the memory button within five seconds. • You readjust the seat position and door mirror before the double-beep. • You set the power mode to any position except ON. 1Recalling the Stored Position The seat and the door mirrors will stop moving if you: • Press the SET button or memory button (1 or (2 . • Adjust the seat position or door mirrors. • Put the transmission into a position other than (P . 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 185 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel 1Adjusting the Steering Wheel 3 WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash. Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped. Controls The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture. 1. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever down. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is under the steering column. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and To lock in or out. u Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators. Lever To adjust 3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up to lock the steering wheel in position. u After adjusting the position, make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out. 185 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 186 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Adjusting the Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position. ■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions * Up Tab Flip the tab to switch the position. The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark. Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Front Seats P. 188 Controls Daytime Position Down Night Position ■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror * and Power Door Mirrors * Sensor Up Down Auto Button 186 1Adjusting the Mirrors * Not available on all models When you are driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror and power door mirror reduce the glare from headlights behind you. Press the AUTO button to turn this function on and off. When activated, the AUTO indicator comes on. 1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror * and Power Door Mirrors * The auto dimming function cancels when the transmission is in (R . 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 187 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors Power Door Mirrors Folding Button * Selector Switch You can adjust the door mirrors when the power mode is in ON. Adjustment Switch ■ Folding door mirrors * Controls ■ Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror. Press the folding button to fold in and out the door mirrors. ■ Reverse Tilt Door Mirror * Selector Switch If activated, either side door mirror automatically tilts downward when you put the transmission into (R ; this improves closein visibility on the selected side of the vehicle when backing up. The mirror automatically returns to its original position when you take the transmission out of (R . To activate this feature, set the power mode to ON, and slide the selector switch to the left or right side. * Not available on all models 187 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 188 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Adjusting the Seats Front Seats Allow sufficient space. Move back. Controls Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible. ■ Adjusting the Seat Positions Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate. Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle. Always make seat adjustments before driving. Horizontal Position Adjustment Height Adjustment * Seat-back Angle Adjustment * Not available on all models 3 WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. ■ Adjusting the front power seats * 188 1Adjusting the Seats 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 189 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats ■ Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch * Press the front: To increase the entire lumbar support. Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar support. Controls Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch * Not available on all models Continued 189 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 190 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats ■ Adjusting the front manual seats * 1Adjusting the front manual seats * Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position. Height Adjustment (Driver side only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat. Controls Seat-back Angle Adjustment Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar. 190 * Not available on all models Pull up the lever to change the angle. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 191 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats ■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs 1Adjusting the Seat-Backs Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel. Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury. Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash. Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat. Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back. Controls The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position. 3 WARNING Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation. If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help. 191 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 192 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats Rear Seats ■ Adjusting the Seat Positions 1Adjusting the Seat Positions Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position. Controls Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up the bar to move the seat, then release the bar. 192 Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 193 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats ■ Folding Down the Rear Seat Separately fold down the left and right halves of the rear seat to make room for cargo. 1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle. 2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling. 2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 42 To return the seat to the original position, pull up the seat-back in the upright position. Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly. 2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 56 The front seats must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold down. To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks. Controls 3. Lower the center head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into the seat-back. 4. Pull up on the seat-back angle adjustment lever. 1Folding Down the Rear Seat Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat cushion are securely latched back into place before driving. Make sure the center shoulder belt is repositioned in the holding slot. Lever 193 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 194 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints Head Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions. ■ Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions Controls Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant’s head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant’s ears should be level with the center height of the restraint. Position head in the center of the head restraint. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button. 194 1Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions 3 WARNING Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash. Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving. In order for the head restraint system to work properly: • Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs. • Do not place any objects between an occupant and the seat-back. • Install each restraint in its proper location. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 195 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints ■ Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Position ■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair. To remove a head restraint: Front and rear outer seat head restraint Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out. Rear center seat head restraint Controls A passenger sitting in the rear center seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button(s). 1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints 3 WARNING Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash. Always replace the head restraints before driving. Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release buttons which are located on the both legs at the same time, and pull the restraint up and out. To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button(s). Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position. 195 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 196 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position Maintain a Proper Sitting Position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. Controls 196 In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag. 1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position 3 WARNING Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 197 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest Armrest ■ Using the Front Seat Armrest Pull down the armrest. Models with adjustable armrest pull the armrest all the way down, then pull it up to the desired angle. Controls ■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest Pull down the armrest of the center backrest. 197 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 198 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items Interior Lights ■ Interior Light Switches 1Interior Light Switches ■ ON Door Activated Position Off Controls On The interior lights come on regardless of whether the tailgate and doors are open or closed. ■ Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: • When tailgate or any doors are opened. • You unlock the driver’s door. • When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). ■ OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the tailgate or the doors are open or closed. In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the following situations: • When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it. • When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) but do not open a door. You can change the interior lights dimming time. Models without Display Audio 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 Models with Display Audio 2 Customized Features P. 359 The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations: • When you lock the driver’s door. • When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY mode. • When you set the power mode to ON. If you leave the tailgate or doors open in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes. To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the interior light on for an extended length of time when the engine or power system is off. 198 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 199 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights ■ Map Lights 1Map Lights ■ Front The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses. Continued Controls ■ Rear The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses when the front interior light switch is in the door activated position. When the front interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens. 199 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 200 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights ■ Cargo Area Light ■ ON The light comes on regardless of whether the tailgate is open or closed. Off On ■ Tailgate activated The light comes on when you open the tailgate, and goes off when closed. Controls 200 Tailgate Activated Position ■ OFF The light stays off with or without opening the tailgate. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 201 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items Interior Convenience Items ■ Glove Box 1Glove Box Pull the lever to open the glove box. You can lock the glove box with the built-in key. To Lock 3 WARNING An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt. Always keep the glove box closed while driving. Controls Glove Box ■ Console Compartment To open the console compartment, press the button to unlock the lid, and then slide it rearward. Button Continued 201 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 202 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Console Tray Slide the tray when you use the console compartment. Controls 202 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 203 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Beverage Holders 1Beverage Holders ■ Front seat beverage holders NOTICE Are located in the console between the front seats. Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior. Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you. ■ Door side beverage holders Are located on the both of front and rear door side pockets. Controls Front Rear Continued 203 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 204 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Rear seat beverage holders Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat beverage holders. Controls 204 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 205 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Accessory Power Sockets 1Accessory Power Sockets The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or ON. ■ Console panel Open the lid and the cover to use it. Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket. The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less. Controls To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running. ■ Console compartment Pull the handle and open the cover to use it. Continued 205 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 206 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Cargo area * Open the cover to use it. Controls ■ AC Power Outlet * The AC power outlet can be used when the engine is running. Open the cover to use it. Plug in the appliance slightly, turn it 90° clockwise, then push it all the way. 1AC Power Outlet * NOTICE Do not use the AC power outlet for electric appliances that require high initial peak wattage, such as cathode-ray tube type televisions, refrigerators, electric pumps, etc. It is not suitable for devices that process precise data, such as medical equipment, and that require an extremely stable power supply, such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc. The AC power outlet is designed to supply power for up to 115 volt appliances that are rated 150 watts or less. Continued use of any electric appliance/device exceeding these ratings may result in damage to the appliance/device. 206 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 207 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Wireless Charger * 1Wireless Charger * * Not available on all models Continued In order to use safely: • Remove any metal objects from the charge pad before charging a device. • Do not open the charger case. • Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact your dealer. 3 CAUTION Metal objects between the charge pad and the device to be charged will get hot and can burn you. • Always remove foreign objects from the charge pad before charging the device. • Be sure the surface is clear of dust and other debris before charging. • Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks, etc.) on the charger and the device. • Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning the charge pad. • Do not cover the system with towels, clothing, or other objects while charging etc. • Avoid spraying aerosols which may come in contact with the charge pad surface. Controls To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows: 1. Place the device you want to charge on the Charging Area charging area. u The system will automatically start Green charging the device, and the green Indicator indicator light will come on. u Make sure that the device is compatible with the system and placed with the chargeable side in the center of the charging area. 2. When charging is completed, the green indicator light will go off. u If the device is not located on the charge area correctly, the green indicator light will blink. 207 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 208 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ When charging does not start 1Wireless Charger * Perform one of the solutions in the following table. Indicator Cause There is an obstacle(s) between the charging area and the device. Remove the obstacle(s). The device is not within the charging area. Move the device to the center of the charging area where is located. The wireless charger is faulty. Turn the vehicle off and back on. If the indicator still blinks, contact a dealer. Slow Blink Controls Fast Blink Solution Using the audio/information screen, you can disable the wireless charger function. 2 Customized Features P. 359 This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the system for a long time when the engine is not running. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine. When using the wireless charger, check the user’s manual that came with the compatible device you want to charge. NOTICE Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision machines within the charging area while charging. The data on your cards such as credit cards can be lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision machines such as watches can go wrong. “Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC). In the following cases, charging may stop or not start: • The device is already fully charged. • The temperature of the device is extremely high while charging. • You are at a place that emits strong electromagnetic waves or noises, such as a TV station, electric power plant, or gas station. 208 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 209 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items 1Wireless Charger * A device may not charge if the size or shape of its chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the charging area. Not all devices are compatible with the system. During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and device to heat up. Controls Charging may be briefly interrupted when: • All the doors and the tailgate are closed - to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the smart entry system. • The position of the device is altered. Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area. ■ Coat Hooks 1Coat Hooks There is a coat hook on the rear grab handle of both sides. Pull it down to use it. * Not available on all models Continued The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy items. 209 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 210 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Sunglasses Holder 1Sunglasses Holder To open the sunglasses holder, push and release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches. You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder. Push Controls ■ Integrated Sunshades * Tab Hook 210 Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items. * Not available on all models 1Integrated Sunshades * Pull the tab and roll up the sunshade all the way. Use the hooks to hang it. Use the sunshades only when the windows are fully closed. Using the shade while a window is open can unhook and blow off the shade, hitting and hurting anyone sitting near the window. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 211 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Front Seat Heaters * 1Front Seat Heaters * The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters. 3 WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters. Press the seat heater button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on) Controls Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters. Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start. After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the seat heater shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment. * Not available on all models Continued 211 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 212 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation * The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters or ventilation. 3 WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters. Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters. Controls 212 1Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation * Press the seat heater or the seat ventilation button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on) * Not available on all models Do not use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start. After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the seat heater shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 213 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Rear Outer Seat Heaters * 1Rear Outer Seat Heaters * The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters. Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters. Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters. Controls There is no heater in the rear center seating position. Press the seat heater button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on) 3 WARNING Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start. After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the rear seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the rear seat heater shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment. * Not available on all models Continued 213 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 214 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Heated Steering Wheel * Heated Steering Wheel Button 1Heated Steering Wheel * The power mode must be in ON to use the heated steering wheel. Press the button on the right side of the steering wheel. Indicator Controls 214 When a comfortable temperature is reached, press the button again to turn it off. The heated steering wheel is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle. * Not available on all models Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 215 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Tie-down Anchors The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor can be used to install a net for securing items. Anchor ■ Cargo Hooks 1Cargo Hooks The cargo hooks on both sides of the cargo area can be used to hang a light items. Controls Anchor Heavy objects may damage the hook. Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than 6.6 lbs (3 kg). Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the cargo area, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible. Continued 215 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 216 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Under-floor Storage Area Pull the handle to open the cargo floor lid. Controls 216 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 217 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Climate Control System Using Automatic Climate Control The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference. Dashboard and Dashboard and floor, Floor vents back of the center and back of the console vents center console vents Floor and defroster vents A/C (Air Conditioning) Button Driver’s Side Temperature Control Switch Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Switch (On/Off) Button SYNC (Synchronization) Button Fan Control Button (Windshield Defroster) Button (Recirculation) Button Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side temperature control switch. 3. Press the ON/OFF button to cancel. Continued If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically. During Auto Idle Stop, air-conditioning is suspended, and only the blower remains active. If you do not want air-conditioning suspended, press the Auto Idle Stop OFF button to cancel Auto Idle Stop. Controls AUTO Button 1Using Automatic Climate Control To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may operate at low speed for a while after the AUTO button has been pressed. While ECON mode is active, the climate control system may have reduced cooling performance. If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down. When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed. 217 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 218 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control ■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Press the button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system. Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations. ■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows Controls Pressing the button turns the air conditioner system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode. Press the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings. 1Using Automatic Climate Control Pressing the ON/OFF button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection. 1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving. Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up. If you press the button during Auto Idle Stop, the engine restarts automatically. If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows. 218 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 219 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control ■ To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Press the 2. Press the 1To rapidly defrost the windows button. button. After defrosting or defogging the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility. Controls 219 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 220 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronization Mode Synchronization Mode 1Synchronization Mode When you press the button, the system changes to synchronization mode. When the system is in synchronization mode off, the temperature for the driver, front passenger, and rear seats can be set separately. Controls You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side, front passenger side and rear seats in synchronization mode. 1. Press the SYNC button. u The system will switch to synchronization mode. 2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control switch. Press the SYNC button to return to synchronization mode off. 220 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 221 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuClimate Control SystemuRear Climate Control System Rear Climate Control System ■ Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Front Panel Controls (Rear On/Off) Button RR SETTINGS Button Use the system when the engine is running and the climate control system is operating. 1. Press the REAR (Rear On/Off) button. 2. Press the RR SETTINGS button. u The system switches to the rear control mode for 10 seconds. The REAR indicator appears on the display. Continued 221 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 222 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuClimate Control SystemuRear Climate Control System 3. Press the AUTO button. u The rear system changes to AUTO mode. u The system automatically adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels to maintain the set rear temperature. Change the temperature if necessary. 4. To turn off the rear climate control system, press the (Rear On/Off) button. ■ Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel * Controls Rear floor vents Rear Temperature Control Buttons Rear AUTO Button Rear console vents and floor vents Rear console vents / (Rear Fan Control) Buttons (Rear On/Off) Button Use the system when the engine is running and the climate control system is operating. 1. Press the (Rear On/Off) button. 2. Press the Rear AUTO button. 3. Adjust the interior temperature using the rear temperature control button. 4. To turn off the rear climate control system, press the button. 222 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 223 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors Automatic Climate Control Sensors Sensor The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them. Controls Sensor 223 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 224 ページ 224 ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 225 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Features This chapter describes how to operate technology features. Audio System About Your Audio System................ 226 USB Ports ......................................... 227 Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 228 Audio System Theft Protection ......... 229 Audio Remote Controls.................... 230 Models with color audio system Audio System Basic Operation ........ 233 Models with Display Audio Audio System Basic Operation ........ 251 Audio Error Messages iPod/USB Flash Drive ........................ 327 * Not available on all models Models with Display Audio Android/Apps .................................. 329 General Information on the Audio System SiriusXM® Radio Service * ................. 330 Compatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives .................................... 331 Honda App License Agreement........ 332 Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/ Android Auto................................. 344 About Open Source Licenses............ 346 License Information * ........................ 347 Models with color audio system Customized Features........................ 352 Models with Display Audio Customized Features........................ 359 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * .. 378 Models with color audio system Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®............. 381 Models with Display Audio Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®............. 406 225 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 226 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Audio System About Your Audio System The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio * service. It can also play USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone, iPad * and Bluetooth® devices. You can operate the audio system from the buttons * and knobs on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface *. 1About Your Audio System SiriusXM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio, contact a dealer. * 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 330 SiriusXM® Radio is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico. * SiriusXM® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc. * *1 Features iPod, iPad, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc. iPod *2 USB Flash Drive Remote Controls 226 * Not available on all models *1 : Models with color audio system *2 : Models with Display Audio State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle. Models with Display Audio After you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, you can use the audio system for up to 30 minutes per driving cycle, or until opening the driver's door. However, whether you can continue using the audio system depends on the battery condition. Repeatedly using this feature may drain the battery. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 227 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports USB Ports Models with color audio system Models with Display Audio 1USB Ports • Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the ■ On the console panel Models with color audio system • u The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on the USB flash drive, connecting a cell phone, and charging devices. Models with Display Audio • • • u The USB port (2.5A) is for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto. u To prevent any potential issues, be sure to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for Android Auto, the USB cables should be certified by USB-IF to be compliant with USB 2.0 Standard. ■ In the console compartment The USB port (2.5A) is only for charging devices. • vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it. We recommend using an extension cable with the USB port. Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub. Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged. We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle. Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version. If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod. Features In the console compartment Install the iPod USB connector or the USB flash drive to the USB port. USB charge The USB port can supply up to 1.0A/2.5A of power. It does not output 1.0A/2.5A unless the device requests. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged. Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON first. In the console compartment This port is for battery charge only. You cannot play music even if you have connected a music player to it. Continued 227 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 228 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack On the back of the console compartment USB Ports ■ On the back of the console compartment * The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices. 1USB Ports On the back of the console compartment This port is for battery charge only. You cannot play music even if you have connected a music player to it. Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise in the radio you are listening to. Features Auxiliary Input Jack Use the jack to connect devices. 1Auxiliary Input Jack Models with color audio system 1. Open the cover. 2. Connect a device to the input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug. u The audio system automatically switches to the AUX mode. To switch to another mode, press the RADIO or MEDIA button. To return to the AUX mode, press the MEDIA button. Models with Display Audio To switch to another mode or return to the AUX mode, select the audio source icon. You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace the audio system. 228 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 229 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection Audio System Theft Protection The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system. ■ Reactivating the audio system 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked. Features 229 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 230 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Audio Remote Controls Models with color audio system 1Audio Remote Controls Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. SOURCE Button / (+ / (Cycles through the audio modes as follows: Buttons Bar FM1FM2AMUSB/iPodBluetooth® AudioAUX SOURCE Button Features 230 (+ / (- (Volume) Bar Press (+ : To increase the volume. Press (- : To decrease the volume. / Buttons • When listening to the radio Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station. • When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song. • When listening to a USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press and hold : To skip to the next folder. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder. Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used. Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be operated. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 231 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Models with Display Audio 1Audio Remote Controls Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on the driver information interface. (+ / (- (Volume) Bar / (+ / (3/4/ Press (+ : To increase the volume. Buttons Bar Press (- : To decrease the volume. Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used. Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be operated. Press the (back) button to go back to the previous screen or cancel a command. Press the (home) button to go back to the home screen of the driver information interface. ENTER Button Continued Features You can show or hide the audio mode icons, or change the order of the icons. 2 Show/Hide Apps P. 116 2 Arrange Apps P. 117 231 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 232 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls 3/4/ / /ENTER Buttons • When selecting the audio mode Press 3 or 4 to select Now Playing on the home screen of the driver information interface, and then press the ENTER button. Features 232 Press 3 or 4 : To cycles through the audio modes as follows: Android Auto/Apple CarPlaySiriusXM® *AUX InputAM Bluetooth® AudioSocial PlaylistFMMy Honda MusicUSB/iPod • When listening to the radio Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. • When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, My Honda Music, or Bluetooth® Audio Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song. * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 233 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Audio System Basic Operation Models with color audio system 1Audio System Basic Operation To use the audio system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK (Day/Night) Button button to access some audio functions. (Sound) Button Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions. Menu Display (Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display. (Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode. (Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen brightness. Press the button, then adjust the brightness using . u Each time you press the button, the mode switches between the daytime mode, nighttime mode and off mode. Rotate Press to select. to enter. Menu Items 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 130 2 Wallpaper Setup P. 236 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 238 2 Display Setup P. 239 2 Scan P. 241, 247 2 Play Mode P. 244, 247 2 RDS Settings P. 241 2 Bluetooth P. 353 One of the operating systems used in this unit is eCos. For software license terms and condition, visit their website (eCos license URL: http://ecos.sourceware.org/license-overview.html) For source code disclosure and other details regarding eCos, visit: http://www.hondaopensource2.com Features (Back) Button MENU/CLOCK Button Selector Knob Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection. MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any mode. The available modes include wallpaper, display, clock, language setup, and play modes. Play mode choices include scan, random, repeat, and so on. These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. or button on the Press the SOURCE, (+ , (- , steering wheel to change any audio setting. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 230 233 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 234 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options. ■ Switching the Display Audio/Information Screen Audio Features Clock/Wallpaper 234 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 235 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Audio Shows the current audio information. ■ Clock/Wallpaper Shows a clock screen or an image you import. ■ Change display 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . u If you want to return to the audio/information screen, select Audio. Features Continued 235 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 236 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Wallpaper Setup 1Wallpaper Setup You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen. ■ Import wallpaper You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive. 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port. • When importing wallpaper files, the image must be • • • • 2 USB Ports P. 227 Features 236 2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 3. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 5. Rotate to select Import, then press . u The picture name is displayed on the list. 6. Rotate to select a desired picture, then press . u The selected picture is displayed. 7. Press to save the picture. 8. Press to select OK. 9. Rotate to select a location to save the picture, then press . u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen. • • in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported. The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 2 MB. The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black. Up to 255 files can be selected. If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No files detected message appears. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 237 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Select wallpaper 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 4. Rotate to select Select, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press 1Wallpaper Setup To go back to the previous screen, press the (Back) button. When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed. . Features ■ To view wallpaper once it is set 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to set, then press . ■ Delete wallpaper 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 4. Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press 6. Rotate to select Yes, then press . u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen. . 237 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 238 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Adjusting the Sound (Sound) Button Press the (sound) button, and rotate to scroll through the following choices: Selector Knob TRE is selectable. Features BAS Bass TRE Treble FAD Fader BAL Balance SUBW SVC Sub woofer Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then press . 238 1Adjusting the Sound The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 239 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen. ■ Changing the Screen Brightness ■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner. Features 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Adjustment, then press . 4. Rotate to select Brightness, then press . 5. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press . 1Changing the Screen Brightness 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Color Theme, then press . 4. Rotate to select the setting you want, then press . 239 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 240 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Playing AM/FM Radio Audio/Information Screen RADIO Button Press to select a band. Features VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. / (Seek/Skip) Buttons Press or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal. Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button. 240 Selector Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection. MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 241 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio ■ Radio Data System (RDS) 1Playing AM/FM Radio Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station. ■ To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select the station, then press . ■ Update List Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Update List, then press The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available. You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into reset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store 6 stations each. Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 230 . 1Radio Data System (RDS) When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency. Features ■ Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press . 4. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press . ■ Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Scan, then press . To turn off scan, press . 241 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 242 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button. 2 USB Ports P. 227 Audio/Information Screen USB Indicator Appears when an iPod is connected. Features MEDIA Button Press to select iPod (if connected). VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. / (Seek/Skip) Buttons Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song. Album Art Play Mode Buttons Press to select a play mode. 242 Selector Knob Turn to change songs. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection. MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 243 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the Selector Knob 1. Press to display the iPod music list. 1Playing an iPod Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system. If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 327 Item Selection 2. Rotate to select a category. Features Category Selection 3. Press to display a list of items in the category. 4. Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen to is displayed. Continued 243 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 244 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select. Play Mode Buttons Features 244 ■ To turn off a play mode Press the selected button. 1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle: Plays all available songs in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Repeat One Track: Repeats the current song. You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press . 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 245 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button. 2 USB Ports P. 227 USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected. / (Seek/Skip) Buttons Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a file. Play Mode Buttons (1-6) Press to select a play mode. Selector Knob Turn to change folders. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection. Features MEDIA Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected). VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Audio/Information Screen MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display. *1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. Continued 245 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 246 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob 1. Press to display a folder list. 1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 330 Files in WMA and AAC format protected by digital rights management (DRM) are not played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file. Folder Selection 2. Rotate to select a folder. Features Track Selection 246 3. Press to display a list of files in that folder. 4. Rotate to select a file, then press . If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 327 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 247 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select. Play Mode Buttons Play Mode Menu Items Repeat Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file. Random Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All: Plays all files in random order. Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder. Features ■ To turn off a play mode Press the selected button. 1How to Select a Play Mode You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press . 247 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 248 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio Playing Bluetooth® Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. 2 Phone Setup P. 387 Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. Features MEDIA Button Press to select the Bluetooth Audio mode (if connected). MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. Pause Button (Preset 2) Press to pause playing a file. Play Button (Preset 1) Press to resume playing a file. / Press Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1888-528-7876. In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving. Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected. If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play. VOL/ (Volume/ Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. 248 Audio/Information Screen Selector Knob Turn to change groups. Press to display a music search list. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection. 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio (Seek/Skip) Buttons or to change files. (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display. In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly. Some functions may not be available on some devices. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 249 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio ■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files MEDIA Button Pause Button Play Button 1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files 1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL. 2. Press the MEDIA button until the Bluetooth® Audio mode is selected. If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected. To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions. The pause function may not be available on some phones. If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack or USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system. ■ To pause or resume a file Press a Play or Pause button to select a mode. Continued Features Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone. 249 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 250 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio ■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob 1. Press Features Category Selection Item Selection 250 2. Rotate to display the music search list. to select a category. 3. Press to display a list of items in the category. 4. Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed. 1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the categories may not be displayed. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 251 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Audio System Basic Operation Models with Display Audio To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. : Select to go to the home screen. (Back) Icon (Home) Icon 2 Switching the Display P. 252 : Select to go back to the previous display when it is displayed. : Select to change the audio/information screen brightness. Select once and select or to make an adjustment. u Each time you select , the mode switches among the daytime mode, nighttime mode and off mode. Features (Day/Night) Icon 251 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 252 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options. ■ Switching the Display ■ Using the audio/information screen Home Screen Models without navigation system (Home) Icon 1Audio/Information Screen Touchscreen Operation • Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping, and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions. • Some items may be grayed out during driving to reduce the potential for distraction. • You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or use voice commands. • Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen response. You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 359 Features Models with navigation system All Apps Select to go to the home screen. Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting 252 All Apps. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 253 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Phone Displays the HFL information. 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 406 ■ Trip Computer Displays the trip computer information. • Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information. • Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives. The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B. To reset Trip A/B, select Reset. To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Trip A Reset Method or Trip B Reset Method. Features ■ Clock Displays the clock. ■ System Updates Updates the software version of the audio system. 2 System Updates P. 265 ■ FM/AM/Sirius XM */USB/Bluetooth Audio/AUX Input/My Honda Music/ Social Playlist Displays the each audio information. ■ Settings Enters the customizing menu screen. 2 Customized Features P. 359 * Not available on all models Continued 253 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 254 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Navigation * Displays the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual ■ HondaLink Displays the HondaLink® screen. 2 HondaLink® P. 312 ■ Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto. 2 Apple CarPlay P. 320 2 Android Auto P. 323 Features ■ Messages Displays the text message screen. 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 406 ■ AT&T Hotspot * Displays the AT&T Hotspot screen. ■ File Manager Displays the file manager screen. 2 File Manager P. 271 254 * Not available on all models 午後３時２９分 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 255 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Wallpaper Setup 1Wallpaper Setup You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen. ■ Import wallpaper 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the front USB port. 2 USB Ports P. 227 6. Import a desired picture. Features 2. Select Clock. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Clock Faces. 5. Select Add More. u The File Manager screen is displayed. The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be displayed on the driver information interface. • The file name must be fewer than 255 characters. • The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, or WebP. • If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No Data message appears. 2 How to Transfer a File P. 271 u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen. Continued 255 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 256 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Select wallpaper 1. Select Clock. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock Faces. 4. Select a desired wallpaper. u The preview is displayed on the screen. 5. Select Save. u The display will return to the clock screen. ■ To view wallpaper once it is set 1. Select . 2. Select Clock. Features ■ Delete wallpaper 1. Select Clock. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock Faces. 4. Select Delete Photos. u The File Manager screen is displayed. 5. Delete a picture. 2 How to Delete a File P. 274 u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen. 256 午後３時２９分 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 257 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Home Screen 1Home Screen The home screen has 5 pages. You cannot add any more pages. ■ To change to a next screen Select to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from any page. Swipe > Icon < Icon Current page position Continued Features Selecting < or > , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen. 257 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 258 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To add app icons on the home screen App icons can be added on the home screen. 1. Select . 2. Select All Apps. 3. Check the box of the app you want to add. u The app icon will be added on the home screen. Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 377 If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 377 In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer. All Apps Icon Features There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen will return to before the browser startup. Check Box 258 1To add app icons on the home screen 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 259 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen. 1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be. Select and hold. 3. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home screen. 1To move icons on the home screen Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again. Features Drag and drop. Continued 259 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 260 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen. 1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove to the Hide icon. Select and hold. u The icon is removed from the home screen. 3. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home screen. Features Drag and drop to Hide icon. 260 1To remove icons on the home screen Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen. Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 261 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To create shortcuts for apps displayed on the home screen 1To create shortcuts for apps displayed on the home screen Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again. Features Three shortcut icons for accessing apps displayed on the home screen are displayed in the upper left area of the screen. You can replace any of these shortcut icons with an icon of your preference. 1. From the home screen, select and hold the icon that you want to store in the upper left of the screen. u The screen will switch to the customization screen. 2. Drag the icon over to the upper left of the Select and hold. screen and drop it over the icon that you Preset want to replace. Icons u The new icon will appear in place of the old icon. 3. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home screen. Drag and drop to preset icon. Continued 261 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 262 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Status Area 1. Select the system status icon. u The status area appears. 2. Select an item to see the details. 3. Select or the system status icon to close the area. System Status Icon Features Status Area 262 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 263 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Updating Apps 1Updating Apps Some of the audio system’s apps can be updated wirelessly when connected via WiFi, or Bluetooth® in conjunction with the HondaLink® app installed on a compatible iOS or Android device. If an update is available, a notification is displayed at the top of the screen with the respective app’s update icon. The wireless updates are for the apps on the audio system only. To update compatible apps on your iPhone or Android phone, please visit the App Store or Google Play Store, respectively. ■ To update an app: 1. A notification appears and notifies you of a update message on the header area. Features 2. Select the system status icon, and then select the software update notification from the list. Continued 263 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 264 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen 3. Select Download. Features 264 4. Select OK. u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful. Select OK. u Restart the engine for the update to be applied. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 265 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates System Updates The audio system’s firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection or with a USB device. ■ How to Update Wirelessly ■ Wireless connection mode setup 1Wireless connection mode setup 1. Select . 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Connection Setup. If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you do not need the wireless connection mode setup. Continued Features 5. Select Change Mode. 6. Select Network, then Save. u The display returns to the network list. 7. Select an access point from the network list, then Connect. u If the audio system requires a password, enter a password. 265 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 266 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates ■ How to update When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the audio/ information screen. Use the following procedure to update the system. 1. Select . 2. Select System Updates. Notification Features 266 3. Select via Wireless. 4. Select Download Now. u A notification appears on the screen. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 267 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates 5. Select Install Now or Install while Vehicle OFF. u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful. 1How to update If Install while Vehicle OFF is selected and the user turns the vehicle back on after the update has been completed, for 3 to 5 minutes the system will rebuild the applications, during which time the Honda logo will be displayed. Features Continued 267 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 268 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates ■ Automatic download settings Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting. 1. Select . 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Auto Download. 5. Select the access point, then Allow. Features 268 ■ View an update result Use the following procedure to confirm the update result. 1. Select . 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Update Result. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 269 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates ■ How to Update with a USB Device 1How to Update with a USB Device ■ Download the update files from the server 1. Select . 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select via USB. u A notification appears on the screen. 4. Connect a USB device into the front USB port. u The inventory data is copied into the USB device. A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space or more is recommended. Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update files from the USB before starting the USB update process. 2 USB Ports P. 227 Continued Features 5. Remove the USB device from the USB port. 6. Connect the USB device into your computer, and then download the update files. u Follow the link to download the required software update files. Refer to https://usb.honda.com for instructions. 269 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 270 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates ■ Update the audio system 1. Select . 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select via USB. u A notification appears on the screen. 4. Connect the USB device with the update files into the USB port. u A notification appears on the screen. 2 USB Ports P. 227 Features 270 5. Select Install Now or Install while Vehicle OFF. u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful. 1Update the audio system If Install while Vehicle OFF is selected and the user turns the vehicle back on after the update has been completed, for 3 to 5 minutes the system will rebuild the applications, during which time the Honda logo will be displayed. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 271 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager File Manager Allows you to transfer image or audio files to the audio system with a USB device. ■ How to Transfer a File 1. Connect a USB device into the USB port. 2 USB Ports P. 227 2. Select , then select All Apps. 3. Select File Manager. 4. Select Transfer Content. Features To transfer a selected file: 5. Select Select Files to Transfer. Continued 271 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 272 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager 6. Select the file or folder you want to transfer. 7. Select OK. Features 272 8. Select Transfer. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Continue. u A notification appears on the screen if the transfer is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen. 1How to Transfer a File To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 273 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager To transfer all files: 5. Select Transfer All Content. Continued 1How to Transfer a File To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen. Features 6. Select Transfer. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Continue. u A notification appears on the screen if the transfer is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen. 273 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 274 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager ■ How to Delete a File 1. Select , then select 2. Select File Manager. 3. Select Delete Content. Features 274 All Apps. To delete a selected file: 4. Select Select Files to Delete. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 275 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager 5. Select the file or folder you want to delete. 6. Select OK. Continued To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen. Features 7. Select Delete. u A notification appears on the screen if the deletion is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen. 1How to Transfer a File 275 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 276 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager To delete all files: 4. Select Delete All Content. Features 276 5. Select Delete. u A notification appears on the screen if the transfer is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen. 1How to Transfer a File To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 277 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Adjusting the Sound 1. Select . 2. Select an audio source icon. 3. Select Sound. 1Adjusting the Sound SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases. You can also adjust the sound the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Sound. * Not available on all models To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Center / Subwoofer Volume and Balance / Fader, select Reset. Features Select an item from the following choices: • Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass • Center / Subwoofer Volume: Center *, Subwoofer • Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader • Audio Zones *: Driver Only, Front Only, Rear Only, Full Vehicle • Speed Volume Compensation: Speed Volume Compensation (SVC) • DTS Neural Surround *: DTS Neural SurroundTM 277 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 278 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Display Setup You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen. ■ Changing the Screen Brightness 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Display. 4. Select Day Mode or Night Mode. 5. Select the setting you want. 6. Select Save. Features 278 1Changing the Screen Brightness You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner. To reset the settings, select Reset. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 279 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup ■ Selecting an Audio Source Select the source icon Source Select Screen Source List Icons ■ Limitations for Manual Operation Features Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source. Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped. 279 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 280 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Voice Control Operation Features 280 Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. The voice control system uses the (talk) and (back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling. 1Voice Control Operation ■ Voice Recognition 1Voice Recognition To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: • Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are using. The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands. 2 Voice Portal Screen P. 281 • Close the windows and moonroof *. • Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone on the ceiling. • Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words. • Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your command if more than one person is speaking at the same time. * Not available on all models When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command. The voice control system can only be used from the driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passenger’s side. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 281 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation ■ Voice Portal Screen The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized. ■ Navigation*1 This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone. • Call • Call • Call Phone commands are not available if using Apple CarPlay. The screen changes the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual ■ Voice Help Readout voice guidance for Help on current screen. ■ Audio When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio. • FM • AM • USB • Sirius XM * • My Honda Music Features When the (talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say “Voice Help” after the beep. ■ Phone *1: Models with navigation system * Not available on all models Continued 281 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 282 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation ■ Phone Commands ■ Audio Commands The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone. • Call • Call • Call The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio. ■ FM Commands • Tune to <87.7-107.9> FM ■ AM Commands • Tune to <530-1710> AM Features ■ Sirius XM Commands * • Channel <1-999> • Channel ■ USB/My Honda Music Commands • • • • • • 282 * Not available on all models Play Artist Play Album Play Genre Play Playlist Play Music Play Song 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 283 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Playing AM/FM Radio Audio/Information Screen Settings Icon Select whether to tune to HD RadioTM* automatically. (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. Seek Icons Select or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal. Features VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select > to display preset 5 onwards. Tune Icon Select to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the radio frequency directly. Scan Icon Select to scan each station with a strong signal. * Not available on all models Continued 283 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 284 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio ■ Preset Memory To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store. ■ Station List Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select the station. Features 284 ■ Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select Refresh. 1Preset Memory The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available. Switching the Audio Mode Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or select the audio source icon on the screen. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 230 You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset memory. Models with HD RadioTM feature HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 285 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio ■ Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Stop or . ■ Radio Data System (RDS) 1Radio Data System (RDS) Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station. ■ To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the station. When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency. Features ■ Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select Refresh. ■ Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Stop or . Continued 285 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 286 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Models with HD RadioTM feature ■ HD Subchannel Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station. 1. Select HD Radio Channels. 2. Select the channel number. Features 286 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 287 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * Playing SiriusXM® Radio * Album Art Station Art VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Channel Icons Select or to the previous or next channel. Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time. Category Icons Select or to display and select a SiriusXM® Radio category. * Not available on all models Features (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. Audio/Information Screen Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select > to display preset 5 onwards. Continued 287 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 288 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ To Change the Tune Mode 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Mode. 3. Select All Channels or Within Category. 1Playing SiriusXM® Radio * In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.). There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system. Features SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections. Switching the Audio Mode Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or select the audio source icon on the screen. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 230 Tune Start: When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Start. 3. Select ON or OFF. To change a category, select Category icons, or select More and then select Category List. 288 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 289 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Preset Memory 1Preset Memory You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset memory. To store a channel: 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store. Continued 1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) TuneMix: The multi-channel preset function can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select TuneMix. 3. Select ON or OFF. When you want to replace the channel, select Replace Preset. If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix, and then select the channel you want to delete. Features ■ Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset. 1. Tune a station. 2. Select and hold the preset number you want to add a music channel. 3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create TuneMix. u A message appears if there are no available presets. 289 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 290 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Listening to Featured Channels Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected. 1. Select Channel List. 2. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed. 3. Select the channel. 1Listening to Featured Channels Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be displayed. Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list. To switch the sorting method, select Number, Name or Category on the upper right of the screen. Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly. Features 290 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 291 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Replay Function 1Replay Function The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast. Move the position you want to replay by selecting or . You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen. After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data. To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon. Audio/Information Screen . (C) (D) (A) Features ■ Returning to real-time broadcast Select and hold The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point. (B) (A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment (C): Length stored in memory (D): Play/Pause icon Continued 291 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 292 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Live Sports Alert 1Live Sports Alert While listening to other channel, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams. ■ To set up a favorite team 1To set up a favorite team 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Favorite Teams. 4. Select + Add Favorite Team. 5. Select a team. Features ■ To set up an alert message 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications. 5. Select Notifications. 6. Select On. 7. Select a favorite team. 292 The sports alert function is active during SiriusXM® mode only. Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 293 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Traffic and Weather Information 1Traffic and Weather Information You can receive traffic and weather information. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Traffic & Weather Setup. 3. Select Selected City. 4. Select the region. u When you do not want to receive the information, select Reset Location. The traffic and weather information function is active during SiriusXM® mode only. Features Continued 293 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 294 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Channel Schedule 1Channel Schedule You can view a channel schedule or receive an alert when your favorite program is about to start. Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly. ■ To view a channel schedule 1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule. Features ■ To set up an alert message 1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule. 3. Select a program. 4. Select Set Program Alert. 5. Select Just Once or Every Time. 1To set up an alert message The alert function is active during SiriusXM® mode only. Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON. If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert. 294 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 295 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Manage Program Alert You can change settings for the alert function. ■ To enable the alert function 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select ON or OFF. Features ■ To remove an alert 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Alerts Set. 4. Select on the alert you want to delete. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Delete. Continued 295 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 296 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Scan Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. 1. Select More. 2. Select Scan. You can change a scan mode by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Scan Mode. 3. Select Channel or Preset. To turn off scan, select Stop. Features 296 1Scan The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®. The “Featured Channels” function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®. TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 297 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then select the USB mode. 2 USB Ports P. 227 Cover Art Features (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. Audio/Information Screen VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Track Icons Select or to change songs. Select and hold to move rapidly within a song. Play/Pause Icon Continued 297 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 298 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List 1. Select Browse. 2. Select the items on that menu. 1Playing an iPod Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system. If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 327 Features 298 If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary. If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/ USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 299 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file. Select or . Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order. Repeat Song: Repeats the current track. Features ■ To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off. 1How to Select a Play Mode 299 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 300 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode. 2 USB Ports P. 227 Features (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. Audio/Information Screen VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Play/Pause Icon Track Icons Select or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track. *1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. 300 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 301 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List 1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 330 1. Select Browse. 2. Select the items on that menu. WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays The selected file cannot be played on this system, then skips to the next file. Continued Features If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 327 301 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 302 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file. ■ Random/Repeat Select or . Features 302 ■ To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off. 1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Random/Repeat Random in Category: Plays all files in the current category in random order. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 303 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music Playing My Honda Music My Honda Music plays audio files that have been imported from a USB flash drive. Your audio system supports audio files in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. 2 File Manager P. 271 Features (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. Audio/Information Screen VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Play/Pause Icon Track Icons Select or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track. *1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. Continued 303 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 304 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music ■ How to Transfer an Audio File 1. Connect a USB device into the USB port. 2 USB Ports P. 227 2. Select More. 3. Select Import Files to My Honda Music. u The File Manager screen is displayed. 4. Transfer an audio file to your audio system. 2 How to Transfer a File P. 271 Features ■ How to delete an audio file 1. Select More. 2. Select Delete Files from My Honda Music. u The File Manager screen is displayed. 3. Delete an audio file. 2 How to Delete a File P. 274 304 1How to Transfer an Audio File If there is no audio file in your audio system, the system will automatically proceed to step 3 after connecting a USB device. Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 330 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 305 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music ■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List 1Playing My Honda Music WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays The selected file cannot be played on this system, then skips to the next file. 1. Select Browse. 2. Select the items on that menu. Features Continued 305 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 306 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file. ■ Random/Repeat Select or . Features 306 ■ To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off. 1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Random/Repeat Random in Category: Plays all files in the current category in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 307 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio Playing Bluetooth® Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. 2 Phone Setup P. 411 Audio/Information Screen Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible. To check if your phone is compatible, • U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. • Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351. It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving. Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected. Features (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be different. Random Icon*1 Select to play all files in the current category in random order. Repeat Icon*1 Select to repeat the current file. Play/Pause Icon Track Icons Select or to change tracks. If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play. In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly. Some functions may not be available on some devices. *1: Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, this function may not be displayed. Continued 307 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 308 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone will be unavailable. However, you can have a second previously paired phone stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting from the Bluetooth® device list. 2 Phone Setup P. 411 ■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files 1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system. 1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions. 2 Phone Setup P. 411 Features ■ To pause or resume a file Select the play/pause icon. 308 2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode. Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone. If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected. You can change the connected phone by selecting Change Device. 2 Phone Setup P. 411 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 309 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio ■ Searching for Music 1Searching for Music 1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums). 3. Select an item. u The selection begins playing. Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed. Features 309 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 310 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Social Playlist Playing Social Playlist The Honda CabinControlTM smartphone app allows users to share audio files from their devices to Social Playlist. Unfortunately, the driver cannot select the audio files from the audio/information screen. The driver can play in order of their choice only if they individually select each song in the queue. The driver cannot rearrange the order of the playlist. 2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 317 Audio/Information Screen Features (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Remove Icon Select to remove the file from the playlist. Random Icon Select to play all files in random order. Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file. Play/Pause Icon Track Icons Select or 310 to change files. 1Playing Social Playlist For more information, check the Honda CabinControl smartphone app instruction manual. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 311 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Social Playlist ■ How to Edit the Playlist Features 1. Select . 2. Select Social Playlist. 3. Select Queue. To play a file on the playlist: u Select the file. To remove a file from the playlist: u Select on the file. To clear the playlist: u Select Clear, and then select Request Songs to reload a playlist. To check the connected device: u Select Device List. 311 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 312 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® HondaLink® HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®. 2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 317 2 Phone Setup P. 411 ■ To Connect to HondaLink® Service Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service. Features 312 ■ To enable the HondaLink® service You need to allow the consent of the location service to enable the HondaLink® service. Disable: Does not allow this consent. Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Never show again.) 1HondaLink® The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones. Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package. When Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is connected to the audio system, HondaLink® can be accessed even without a Wi-Fi connection. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 313 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® ■ To link with HondaLink® You may see the connection guide screen after launching HondaLink® when there is no connection available. ■ HondaLink® Menu Features ■ Vehicle Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service. ■ Help & Support Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service center. Continued 313 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 314 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® ■ Messages from Honda Displays helpful and important information from Honda. ■ Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation. 1. A notification appears and notifies you of a new message on the header area. Features Notification 2. A notification is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read. 314 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 315 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® 3. Select the system status icon to see the messages. 4. Select a new message to open. Features Continued 315 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 316 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® ■ Operator Assistance * Connect to the HondaLink® operator when trying to find a destination or for roadside assistance. 1. Press the LINK button. u Connection to the operator begins. LINK 2. Talk to the operator. Button u To disconnect, select Hang Up on the audio/information screen or press the button on the steering wheel. Features Audio/information screen when connected to the HondaLink® operator. 316 * Not available on all models 1Operator Assistance * Remain attentive to road conditions and driving during operator assistance. If you want to add or renew a subscription, call the Operator Assistance. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Subscription. 5. Select HondaLink Subscription Status. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 317 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection Wi-Fi Connection You can connect the audio system to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites or use online services on the audio/information screen. If your phone has cell hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to setup. ■ Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time) 1Wi-Fi Connection Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. 1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time) Continued You cannot go through the setting procedure while a vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the Wi-Fi connection. Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package. Features 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Wi-Fi. 5. Select Change Mode. 6. Select Network or HotSpot, then Save. u To change the Wi-Fi settings, select Network Options or HotSpot Options. u Select the access point you want to connect to the system. 7. Select Connect. u Enter a password for the access point, and select OK. u When the connection is successful, the icon is displayed on the list. 8. Select to go back to the home screen. Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity. You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or off with the icon on the Wi-Fi network list. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen. In case of Wi-Fi connection with your phone, make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode. 317 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 318 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection ■ Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made) Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode. Features 318 1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made) iPhone users You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi-Fi connection again after you boot your phone. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 319 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free Siri Eyes Free You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. 1Siri Eyes Free Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc. 2 Phone Setup P. 411 Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri. While driving we recommend only using Siri through the button on the steering wheel (Siri Eyes Free). ■ Using Siri Eyes Free 1Using Siri Eyes Free Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps. Appears when Siri is activated in Siri Eyes Free (Talk) Button Press and hold until the display changes as shown. Features (Back) Button Press to deactivate Siri. While in Siri Eyes Free: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appears. 319 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 320 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Apple CarPlay If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the front USB port, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages. 1Apple CarPlay Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay. 2 USB Ports P. 227 Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps. ■ Apple CarPlay Menu Home screen Features Apple CarPlay icon Apple CarPlay menu screen Select the Honda icon to go back to the home screen Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen ■ Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail. ■ Messages Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you. ■ Music Play music stored on your iPhone. 320 * Not available on all models To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the USB port located on the console panel. The USB ports located in the console compartment and on the back of the console compartment * will not enable Apple CarPlay operation. 2 USB Ports P. 227 While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone. 2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 321 When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected. 2 Phone Setup P. 411 For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 321 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay ■ Maps Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone. Models with navigation system Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the front USB port, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen. ■ Enabling Apple CarPlay Enable: Allows this consent. Disable: Does not allow this consent. You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu. Continued Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply. Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality. It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps. Features ■ Setting Up Apple CarPlay 1Apple CarPlay 1Setting Up Apple CarPlay You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlay: Select HOMESettingsConnectionsApple CarPlay Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple’s Privacy Policy. 321 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 322 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay ■ Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Press and hold the (Talk) button to activate Siri. 1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri: • What movies are playing today? • Call dad at work. • What song is this? • How’s the weather tomorrow? • Read my latest email. • Find a table for four tonight in Chicago. For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri. Features 322 (Talk) Button: Press and hold to activate Siri. Press again to deactivate Siri. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 323 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto Android Auto When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the front USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto. 2 USB Ports P. 227 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 325 1Android Auto To use Android Auto, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone. Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android Auto phone. Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps. Features To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the USB port located on the console panel. The USB ports located in the console compartment and on the back of the console compartment * will not enable Android Auto operation. 2 USB Ports P. 227 To directly access the Android Auto phone function, press Phone on the home screen. 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 325 When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is connected. 2 Phone Setup P. 411 * Not available on all models Continued 323 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 324 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto ■ Android Auto Menu 1Android Auto For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage. : Go back to the home screen Android Auto icon Features a Maps (Navigation) Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs. Models with navigation system Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. The audio/information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination. b Phone (Communication) Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail. c Google Now (Home screen) Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when they’re needed. 324 Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply. Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality. It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 325 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto d Music and audio Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto. To switch between music apps, press this icon. e Go back to the Home Screen. f Voice Operate Android Auto with your voice. ■ Auto Pairing Connection When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the front USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated. 1Enabling Android Auto Enable: Allows this consent. Disable: Does not allow this consent. You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu. Only initialize Android Auto when you safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone. Features ■ Enabling Android Auto You can use the method below to change Android Auto settings after you have completed the initial setup: Select HOMESettingsConnectionsAndroid Auto Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy. Continued 325 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 326 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto ■ Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition Press and hold the (Talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice. 1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition: • Reply to text. • Call my wife. • Navigate to Honda. • Play my music. • Send a text message to my wife. • Call flower shop. For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage. Features 326 (Talk) Button: Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system. You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 327 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Audio Error Messages iPod/USB Flash Drive If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer. Error Message Solution Appears when there is a problem with the audio system. Check if the device is compatible with the audio system. Bad USB Device*1 Problem reading connected device. See Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible devices. If device is compatible, try reconnecting device. If this error remains, contact Honda dealer.*2 Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error. Unsupported Ver*1 Problem reading connected device. See Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible devices. If device is compatible, try reconnecting device. If this error remains, contact Honda dealer.*2 • Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version. • Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is connected, reconnect the device. Features USB Error*1 Problem reading connected device. See Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible devices. If device is compatible, try reconnecting device. If this error remains, contact Honda dealer.*2 *1:Models with color audio system *2:Models with Display Audio Continued 327 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 328 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive Error Message Problem reading connected device. See Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible devices. If device is compatible, try reconnecting device. If this error remains, contact Honda dealer.*2 Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod. Unplayable File*1 The selected file cannot be played on this system*2 Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about three seconds, then plays the next song. Features iPod Appears when the iPod is empty. No Data The connected device does not contain any USB flash drive files that can be played on this system. See Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible file the USB flash drive. types.*2 iPod and USB flash drive Check that compatible files are stored on the device. *1 *1:Models with color audio system *2:Models with Display Audio 328 Solution 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 329 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps Models with Display Audio Android/Apps If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer. Error Message Unfortunately, **** has stopped.*1 **** is not responding. Would you like to close it?*1 Solution Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app. App is not responding. Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data Reset. *1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs. Features 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 377 329 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 330 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 General Information on the Audio System SiriusXM® Radio Service * ■ Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio 1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the screen, select Channel to 0. 2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to subscribe. ■ Receiving SiriusXM® Radio Features Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception. ■ SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages Channel not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.: You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription Update: SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network. Channel Not Available: No such channel exits, or the artist or title information is unavailable. No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Check Tuner: There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer. Check Antenna: There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer. 330 * Not available on all models 1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio: • US: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com/subscribenow or 1-866-635-2349 • Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/subscribe-now or 1-877-209-0079 1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator. You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances: • In a location with an obstruction to the south of your vehicle. • In tunnels • On the lower level of a multi-tiered road • Large items carried on the roof rack 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 331 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives Compatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives ■ iPod, iPad, and iPhone Model Compatibility Model 1iPod, iPad, and iPhone Model Compatibility This system may not work with all software versions of these devices. ■ USB Flash Drives • • • • • A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. Some digital audio players may not be compatible. Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported. Features iPod (5th generation) iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007) iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008) iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009) iPod nano (1st to 6th generation) released between 2005 and 2010*2 iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012*1 iPod touch (1st to 4th generation) released between 2007 and 2010*2 iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2007 and 2012*1 iPhone*1/iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s/ iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 7*2/iPhone 7 Plus*2 iPad*1/iPad 2*1/iPad (3rd generation)*1/iPad (4th generation)*1 iPad Air*1/iPad Air 2*1 iPad mini*1/iPad mini 2*1/iPad mini 3*1 1USB Flash Drives Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device. *1: Models with Display Audio *2: Models with color audio system 331 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 332 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Honda App License Agreement ■ END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. Features A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services. B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property. 1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT. 2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the “HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE. 332 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 333 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE. Features 4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE. 5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use. (a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. Continued 333 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 334 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Features (b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not: (1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION; (2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES; (3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way; (4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights; (5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations; (6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or (7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses. 6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers. 334 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 335 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments. C. SOFTWARE Operation 1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA. Features 2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information. 3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES. 4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content. Continued 335 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 336 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE. Features 6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-theair, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. 7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void. D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings 1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent. 336 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 337 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices. Features 3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. 4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash. Continued 337 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 338 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement E. Information Collection and Storage 1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you. 2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information. Features (a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals. (b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS. (c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility. 338 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 339 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Features F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, noninfringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you. G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights. 1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. Continued 339 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 340 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length. Features (a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES. H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES. 340 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 341 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. K. Termination and Transfer. 1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. Features J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION. 2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Continued 341 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 342 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Features 342 M. ARBITRATION: PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION. Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 343 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA. This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out. Features N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only. 343 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 344 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Models with Display Audio Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto ■ OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY. Features 344 USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 345 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto ■ DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY Features YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. 345 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 346 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses About Open Source Licenses Models with Display Audio To see the open source license information, follow these steps. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select About. 5. Select Legal Information. Models with color audio system Features 346 Project/Component Name: BT module/eCos Homepage URL: http://ecos.sourceware.org/ License: GPL-2.0 License Link: http://ecos.sourceware.org/license-overview.html License Text: http://www.hondaopensource2.com/ Notices: http://www.hondaopensource2.com/ Location of Corresponding Source: http://www.hondaopensource2.com/ 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 347 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information * License Information * ■ DOLBY DIGITAL Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Features ■ DTS For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. * Not available on all models Continued 347 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 348 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information * ■ Bluetooth The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by DENSO CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. ■ Windows Media Features 348 This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 349 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information * ■ Apple “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. Apple, the Apple Logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPad Air, iPad mini, iPad Pro, Apple CarPlay, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. Features Continued 349 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 350 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information * ■ MPEG Features Mpeg4 Visual THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD (“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM. VC-1 This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal use of a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/ VC-1 Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C. See http://www.mpegla.com. 350 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 351 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information * AVC/H.264 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM. microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. Features ■ SDHC Memory Card 351 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 352 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Customized Features Models with color audio system 1Customized Features Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features. ■ How to customize While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings, press the button, then select Phone Setup. Audio/Information Screen (Phone) Button When you customize settings, make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P . 1How to customize These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter. To customize other features, select Settings, rotate , then press . 2 List of customizable options P. 356 Features MENU/CLOCK Button Selector Knob 352 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 353 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu ■ Customization Flow Press the MENU/CLOCK button. Adjust Clock Settings RDS Settings RDS Information Radio Text Bluetooth Setup Add New Device Connect an Audio Device Features Display Adjustment Brightness Contrast Black Level Rear Camera Camera Guideline Brightness Contrast Black Level Color Tint Continued 353 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 354 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Display Change Audio Wallpaper Wallpaper Select Import Delete Features Color Theme Blue Red Amber Gray Language Clock Format 12h 24h 354 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 355 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press Bluetooth Setup . Add New Device Connect a Phone Connect an Audio Device Disconnect All Devices Delete Device Pass-Key Ringtone Features Speed Dial Fixed Mobile Phone Caller ID Info Name Priority Number Priority System Clear Continued 355 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 356 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu ■ List of customizable options Setup Group Customizable Features — 2 Clock P. 130 RDS Settings Bluetooth Setup RDS Information Radio Text Features Add New Device Connect an Audio Device Brightness Display Contrast Adjustment Black Level Camera Guideline Rear Camera Brightness Contrast Black Level Color Tint *1:Default Setting 356 Selectable Settings Adjusts clock. Adjust Clock Settings Description Selects whether the RDS information comes on. Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. On*1/Off — See Bluetooth Setup on P. 358 Changes the brightness of the audio/ information screen. Changes the contrast of the audio/ information screen. Changes the black level of the audio/ information screen. Selects whether the guidelines come on the audio/information screen. — — — On*1/Off See Display Adjustment on P. 356 Changes the color of the audio/information screen. Changes the tint of the audio/information screen. — — 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 357 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Display Change Select Wallpaper Import Delete Settings Color Theme Language Changes the display type. Changes the wallpaper type. Selectable Settings Audio*1/Wallpaper Clock*1/Image1/Image2/ Image3 Imports an image file for a new wallpaper. — 2 Wallpaper Setup P. 236 Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Changes the background color of the audio/ information screen. Changes the display language. Selects the digital clock display from 12h to 24h. Image1*1/Image2/Image3 Blue*1/Red/Amber/Gray English*1/French/Spanish 12h*1/24h Features Clock Format Description *1:Default Setting Continued 357 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 358 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Add New Device Connect a Phone Bluetooth Setup Phone Setup Features Speed Dial Ringtone Caller ID Info System Clear *1:Default Setting 358 Description Pairs a new phone to HFL. 2 Phone Setup P. 387 Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone to HFL. Selectable Settings — — 2 Phone Setup P. 387 Connect an Audio Device Disconnect All Devices Delete Device Pass-Key Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL. — Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. Deletes a paired phone. Changes a pairing code. Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry. — — — 2 Speed Dial P. 396 — Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile Phone*1 Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number Name Priority*1/Number as the caller ID. Priority Cancels/Resets all customized items in the — Phone Setup group as default. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 359 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Customized Features Models with Display Audio 1Customized Features Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features. ■ How to customize With the power mode in ON, select Settings, then select a setting item. When you customize settings, make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P . To customize other features, select Settings. 2 List of customizable options P. 366 Features Audio/Information Screen Continued 359 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 360 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu ■ Customization flow Select . Date & Time Set Date & Time Automatic Date & Time Set Date Set Time Set Time Zone Automatic Time Zone * Select time zone Select Settings. Select Time Format Features System Volumes Navigation Guidance * System Touch Sensitivity Subscriptions Language Factory Data Reset About 360 System Sounds * Not available on all models HondaLink Subscription Status 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 361 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Advanced Options App Manager Recent Location Request from Apps Location Setting Interruptions Continued Features Interruption Mode Events and reminders Calls Messages Calls/messages from 361 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 362 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Bluetooth + Connect New Device Saved Devices Connections Wi-Fi Change Mode Connected Devices Android Auto Apple CarPlay CabinControl Features 362 Options (Device list) CabinControl Connection Information 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 363 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Driving Position Setup * Seat Position Movement at Entry/Exit Memory Position Link Meter Setup Adjust Outside Temp Display Trip A Reset Timing Trip B Reset Timing Reverse Shift Position Beep Auto Idle Stop Display Vehicle Power Tailgate Setup * Features Adjust Alarm Volume Turn by Turn Display Fuel Efficiency Backlight Power Tailgate Keyless Open Mode Power Tailgate Open by Outer Handle Hands Free Access Power Tailgate * Keyless Access Setup Door Unlock Mode Keyless Access Light Flash Keyless Access Beep Remote Start System On/Off Walk Away Auto Lock * Not available on all models Continued 363 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 364 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Driver Assist System Setup Forward Collision Warning Distance ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Road Departure Mitigation Setting Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep Blind Spot Information * Door Setup Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock Key and Remote Unlock Mode Features Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer Lighting Setup Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Auto Headlight On with Wiper On Auto Light Sensitivity Wireless Charger * Maintenance Information 364 * Not available on all models Oil Life 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 365 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Camera Rear Camera Default Camera View Guidelines Cross Traffic Monitor * LaneWatch * Show with Turn Signal Show Reference Line Display Brightness Contrast Sound Features Black Level Bass / Treble Center / Subwoofer Volume * Subwoofer Volume * Balance / Fader Audio Zones * Speed Volume Compensation DTS Neural Surround * Notifications * Not available on all models Continued 365 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 366 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu ■ List of customizable options Setup Group Customizable Features Set Date & Time Automatic Date & Time Set Date Set Time Features System Date & Time Set Time Zone 366 * Not available on all models Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function. Selectable Settings ON*1/OFF Adjusts date. — 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 130 Adjusts clock. — 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 130 Automatic Time Zone * Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust the clock when driving through different time zones. Select time zone Changes the time zone manually. Select Time Format *1:Default Setting Description Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. ON*1/OFF — 12H*1/24H 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 367 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features System Volumes Selectable Settings System Sounds Changes the system sounds volume. — Navigation Guidance * Changes the navigation guidance volume. — Touch Sensitivity Subscriptions Description HondaLink Subscription Status Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Low*1 Lists subscriptions and subscription status for HondaLink®. — Language Changes the display language. Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default. About Displays the Android setting items. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 377 English (United States)*1/English (United Kingdom)/ Korean/French/ Spanish/Arabic Features System Continue/Cancel — *1:Default Setting * Not available on all models Continued 367 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 368 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Features System Customizable Features Displays the Android system memory and apps information. — Recent Location Request from Apps Displays the recent location requests from apps. — Location Setting Selects OFF not to allow apps including the navigation system * to access the vehicle’s location. ON*1/OFF Interruption Mode Sets the interruption mode for allowing to notify when calls and notifications arrive. Always interrupt*1/ Don’t interrupt/ Allow only priority interruptions Events and reminders Sets priority interruptions of events and reminders. ON*1/OFF Calls Sets priority interruptions of calls. ON*1/OFF Messages Sets priority interruptions of messages. ON*1/OFF Sets priority interruptions of from who. Anyone*1/Contacts only/Starred contacts only Interruptions Calls/ messages from 368 * Not available on all models Selectable Settings App Manager Advanced Options *1:Default Setting Description 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 369 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Bluetooth + Connect New Device Saved Devices Description Selectable Settings Pairs a new phone to HFL. — 2 Phone Setup P. 411 Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone. — 2 Phone Setup P. 411 Network*1/HotSpot/ OFF Change Mode Changes the Wi-Fi mode. Available Networks/ Connected Devices Displays the available network(s) or current connected device(s). — Android Auto Sets up the Android Auto connection. — Apple CarPlay Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection. — Wi-Fi CabinControl Turns the Honda CabinControl function on and off. Connection Information Displays the Honda CabinControl connection information. — Selects functions or deletes a device. — Features Connections ON*1/OFF Options CabinControl (Device list) *1:Default Setting Continued 369 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 370 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Driving Position Setup * Features Vehicle Meter Setup *1:Default Setting 370 * Not available on all models Description Selectable Settings Seat Position Movement at Entry/ Exit Moves the seat rearward when you get in/get out of the vehicle. Changes the setting for this feature. ON*1/OFF Memory Position Link Turns the driving position memory system on and off. ON*1/OFF Adjust Outside Temp Display Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees. -5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.) -3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C (Canada) Trip A Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and average fuel economy A. With Refuel/IGN Off/Manually Reset*1 Trip B Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and average fuel economy B. With Refuel/IGN Off/Manually Reset*1 Reverse Shift Position Beep Turns the reverse alert tone on and off. ON/OFF*1 Auto Idle Stop Display Selects whether the Auto Idle Stop display comes on or not. ON*1/OFF Adjust Alarm Volume Changes the alarm volume, such as the buzzers, warnings, turn signal sound, and so on. High/Mid*1/Low 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 371 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings Turn by Turn Display Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on during the route guidance. ON*1/OFF Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON*1/OFF Power Tailgate Keyless Open Mode Changes the keyless setting for when the power tailgate opens. Anytime*1/When Unlocked Power Tailgate Open by Outer Handle Changes the setting to open power tailgate by tailgate outer handle. Off (Manual only)/ On (Power/ Manual)*1 Hands Free Access Power Tailgate * Changes the setting to open power tailgate by a swift forward in and out kicking motion under the rear bumper. ON*1/OFF Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s door handle. Driver Door or Tailgate*1/All Doors Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the doors. ON*1/OFF Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors. ON*1/OFF Meter Setup Keyless Access Setup Features Vehicle Power Tailgate Setup * *1:Default Setting * Not available on all models Continued 371 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 372 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Keyless Access Setup Features Vehicle Driver Assist System Setup *1:Default Setting 372 * Not available on all models Description Selectable Settings Remote Start System On/Off Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON*1/OFF Walk Away Auto Lock Changes the settings for the automatic locking the doors when you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the remote. Enable/Disable*1 Forward Collision Warning Distance Changes at which distance CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/ Short ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC range. ON/OFF*1 Road Departure Mitigation Setting Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system. Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended. ON/OFF*1 Blind Spot Information * Changes the setting for the blind spot information. Audible and Visual Alert*1/Visual Alert/ OFF 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 373 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Selectable Settings With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift from P/OFF Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors unlock automatically. All Doors with Driver’s Door Opens*1/All Doors with Shift to P/All Doors with IGN Off/ OFF Key and Remote Unlock Mode Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock on the first push of the remote or built-in key. Driver Door*1/All Doors Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. ON*1/OFF Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening any door. 90 sec/60 sec/30 sec*1 Door Setup Features Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature. Auto Door Lock Vehicle Description *1:Default Setting Continued 373 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 374 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Lighting Setup Features Vehicle *1:Default Setting 374 * Not available on all models Selectable Settings Interior Light Dimming Time Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors. 60 sec/30 sec*1/15 sec Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver’s door. 60 sec/30 sec/15 sec*1/0 sec Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position. Min/Low/Mid*1/ High/Max Auto Headlight On with Wiper On Changes the settings for the wiper operation when the headlights automatically come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position. ON*1/OFF Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*1/ Low/Min Turns the wireless charger feature on and off. ON*1/OFF Wireless Charger * Maintenance Information Description Oil Life Resets the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service. — 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 375 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Default Camera View Description Changes the camera view mode when the rear camera monitor is turned on. 2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 550 Rear Camera Guidelines Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear camera monitor. 2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 550 Camera Contrast Black Level Dynamic/Fixed/ Both*1/OFF Turns the cross traffic monitor on and off. ON*1/OFF Show with Turn Signal Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a right turn. ON*1/OFF Show Reference Line Selects whether the reference lines come on the LaneWatch monitor. ON*1/OFF Features Display Last Used/Normal View/Wide View*1 Cross Traffic Monitor * LaneWatch * Brightness Selectable Settings Adjusts the settings of the audio/information screen. 2 Display Setup P. 278 *1:Default Setting * Not available on all models Continued 375 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 376 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings Bass / Treble Center / Subwoofer Volume * Subwoofer Volume * Sound Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 277 Balance / Fader Features Audio Zones * Speed Volume Compensation DTS Neural Surround * Notifications *1:Default Setting 376 * Not available on all models Changes the notification settings for apps. — 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 377 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings Defaulting All the Settings Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Factory Data Reset. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. 5. Select Continue to reset the settings. 6. Select Continue again to reset the settings. u The system will reboot. 1Defaulting All the Settings When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data. If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default. If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it becomes off line. 2 HondaLink® P. 312 Features 377 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 378 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems. ■ Important Safety Precautions Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer. Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage. Features 378 When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path. * Not available on all models 1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 379 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink Training HomeLink Indicator I HomeLink Button III HomeLink Button If it is necessary to erase a previously entered learned code: • Press and hold the I and III HomeLink buttons for about 10 seconds, until the orange indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1. • If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1. The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800)355-3515. Features Continued 379 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 380 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink ■ Programming a Button 1Training HomeLink 1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink® button you want to program. 2. Press and release the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly flashing orange? NO YES Features 3a. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds. 4. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a second. Does the device (garage door opener) work? YES 3b. Canadian Garage Door Opener A. Press and release the HomeLink button. Press, hold and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds. NO 5. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. Training Complete HomeLink LED is continuously on green. 6. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate. Training Complete 380 HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes green. 5a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the “learn” button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener). 5b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs. Reprogramming a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash orange. This should take about 20 seconds. 2. Release the HomeLink button and position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 - 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program, then follow steps 3 - 6 under “programming a button.” Erasing Button Memory To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink indicator changes from orange to rapidly flashing green. This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all programming before selling the vehicle. Operating To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device. Questions For questions or comments, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline (North America only) at (800) 355-3515. HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 381 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Models with color audio system 1Using HFL Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone. Place your phone where you can get good reception. To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1888-528 -7876. Using HFL ■ HFL Buttons Microphone Volume up Volume down (Talk) Button (Hang-up/Back) Button (Pick-up) Button Selector Knob (Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen or to answer an incoming call. (Hang-up/Back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. (Phone) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press . Features (Phone) Button Voice control tips • Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone. • Press and release the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep. • If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted. • To change the volume level, use the audio system's volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel. State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle. If you receive a call while using the audio system, the system resumes its operation after ending the call. Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled. 2 Speed Dial P. 396 Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled. Continued 381 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 382 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL ■ HFL Status Display Battery Level Status 1Using HFL The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call. Signal Strength Roaming Status Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. HFL Mode Caller's Name HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended. Features 1HFL Status Display The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models. ■ Limitations for Manual Operation Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped. Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion. 2 Speed Dial P. 396 382 Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 383 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus HFL Menus The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system. 1HFL Menus To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked. or Phone Speed Dial*1 Add New Some functions are limited while driving. Call History*1 Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number. Phone Number Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number. Dialed Calls Display the last 20 outgoing calls. Received Calls Display the last 20 incoming calls. Missed Calls Display the last 20 missed calls. Phonebook*1 Display the paired phone’s phonebook. Dial*1 Enter a phone number to dial. Features (Existing entry list) Call History *1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. Continued 383 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 384 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Redial*1 Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history. Phone Setup Bluetooth Setup Features Add New Device Pair a phone to the system. Connect a Phone Connect a phone to the system. Connect an Audio Device Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the system. Disconnect All Devices Disconnect a paired device from the system. *1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. 384 Delete Device Delete a previously paired device. Pass-Key Change a pairing code. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 385 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Speed Dial*1 Add New Call History Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number. Phone Number Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number. Features Existing entry list Change Speed Dial *1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Change a previously stored speed dial number. Delete Speed Dial Delete a previously stored speed dial number. Store Voice Tag Create a voice tag for a speed dial number. Change Voice Tag Change a voice tag for a speed dial number. Delete Voice Tag Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number. Continued 385 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 386 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Ringtone Features Caller ID Info System Clear 386 Fixed Select the ring tone stored in HFL. Mobile Phone Select the ring tone stored in the connected cell phone. Name Priority Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID. Number Priority Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the caller ID. Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security codes. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 387 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phone Setup 1Phone Setup ■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no Phone Pairing Tips: • You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving. • Up to six phones can be paired. • Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is connected to HFL. • If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle. Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following: : The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio. Features phone paired to the system) 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 3. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth® device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink. Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls. 5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone. 6. A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful. Continued 387 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 388 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system) 1. Press the button or the button. u If a prompt appears asking to connect to a phone, select No and proceed with step 2. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . Features 4. Rotate to select Add New Device, then press . u The screen changes to device list. 5. Rotate . 388 to select Add New, then press 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 389 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus 6. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth® device. Features 7. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink. 8. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by a phone. Continued 389 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 390 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To change the currently paired phone 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . Features 4. Rotate to select Connect a Phone, then press . u The screen changes to a device list. 5. Rotate to select a desired device name, then press . u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone. 390 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 391 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To change the pairing code setting 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . 4. Rotate . to select Pass-Key, then press Features 5. Input a new pairing code, then press . Continued 391 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 392 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To delete a paired phone 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . Features 4. Rotate to select Delete Device, then press . u The screen changes to a device list. 5. Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press . 6. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 392 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 393 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Ring Tone 1Ring Tone You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Ringtone, then press . 4. Rotate to select Mobile Phone or Fixed, then press . 1Caller’s ID Information You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming call. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Caller ID Info, then press . 4. Rotate to select a mode you want, then press . Continued Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is stored in the phonebook. Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is displayed. Features ■ Caller’s ID Information Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected. 393 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 394 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To Clear the System All speed dial entries, all imported phonebook data, all call history data, paired phones, pairing codes, caller’s ID settings, and volume settings are reset as default. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select System Clear, then press . 4. Rotate to select Yes, then press . Features 5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 6. A notification appears on the screen. Press . 394 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 395 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL. 1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name. Pref Fax Home Car Mobile Other Work Voice If a name has four or more numbers, ... appears instead of category icons. Features Pager On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL. The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call. Continued 395 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 396 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Speed Dial 1Speed Dial Features Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select Add New, then press . 4. Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press . From Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Phonebook: u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook. From Phone Number: u Input the number manually. 5. When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to say the name for the speed dial entry. 396 When a voice tag is stored, you can press the button and call the number using voice commands. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 397 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To edit a speed dial 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Change Speed Dial, then press . 6. Select a new speed dial number, then press . Features Continued 397 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 398 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. Features 398 ■ To change a voice tag 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Change Voice Tag, then press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. 1Speed Dial Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using “home” as a voice tag. It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.” 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 399 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Continued Features ■ To delete a voice tag 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag, then press . u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . ■ To delete a speed dial number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial, then press . u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 399 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 400 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Making a Call You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial. 1Making a Call Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts. Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers. Features 400 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 401 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using the imported ■ To make a call using a phone number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select a number, then press . 4. Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically. Continued 1To make a call using the imported phonebook This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands. 2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 382 2 Speed Dial P. 396 Features phonebook When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press . 3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically. Rotate to select the initial, then press . 4. Rotate to select a name, then press . 5. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically. 1To make a call using a phone number This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands. 2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 382 2 Speed Dial P. 396 401 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 402 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using redial 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Redial, then press u Dialing starts automatically. 1To make a call using redial . ■ To make a call using the call history Features 402 Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Call History, then press . 3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received Calls, or Missed Calls, then press . 4. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically. Press and hold the button to redial the last number dialed in your phone’s call history. 1To make a call using the call history The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.) 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 403 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically. 1To make a call using a speed dial entry When a voice tag is stored, press the button and call the number using voice commands. 2 Speed Dial P. 396 Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts. Features Continued 403 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 404 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Receiving a Call HFL Mode 1Receiving a Call When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds and the Incoming Call screen appears. Press the Press the call. Caller’s Name Features 404 button to answer the call. button to decline or end the Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the button again to return to the current call. Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call. You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons. Rotate to select the icon, then press . 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 405 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Options During a Call Dial Tones: Available on some phones. Features The following options are available during a call. Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone. Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. 1. To view the available options, press the button. 2. Rotate to select the option, then press . u The check box is checked when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off. 1Options During a Call 405 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 406 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Models with Display Audio 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone. Using HFL ■ HFL Buttons (Back) Button Microphone 3/4/ / Buttons ENTER Button Features Volume up Place your phone where you can get good reception. To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities, • U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. • Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351. To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be ON. 2 Phone Setup P. 411 Volume down Voice control tips • Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the (Home) Button (Talk) Button (Hang-up) Button (Pick-up) Button windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphones. • Press the button when you want to call a number using a phonebook name or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep. • If the microphones pick up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted. • To change the volume level, select the audio system’s VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on the steering wheel. If there is no speed dial entry in the system, the popup notification appears on the screen. 2 Favorite Contacts P. 416 If there is no call history, the call history is disabled. 406 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 407 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL (Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen of the driver information interface, or to answer an incoming call. (Hang-up) button: Press to end a call. (Back) button: Press to go back to the previous screen, or cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal. 3/4/ / buttons: Press to select an item displayed on the phone screen of the driver information interface. ENTER button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone screen of the driver information interface. (Home) button: Press to go back to the home screen of the driver information interface. 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended. Features To go to the phone screen of the driver information interface: 1. Press the (home) button on the steering wheel. 2. Select Phone. u You can select Favorite Contacts or Recent Calls. Continued 407 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 408 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL ■ HFL Status Display 1HFL Status Display The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call. Bluetooth Indicator Signal Strength Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. Battery Level Status HFL Mode Caller’s Name Caller’s Number Features ■ Limitations for Manual Operation Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped. Only previously stored phonebook names or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion. 2 Favorite Contacts P. 416 408 The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 409 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus HFL Menus The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system. 1HFL Menus To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked. ■ Phone settings screen 1. Select . 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Settings. + Connect New Device (Existing entry list) Auto Sync Phone Auto Phone Call Transfer Ringtone HondaLink Assist Pair a new phone to the system. Features Change Connected Phone Some functions are limited while driving. Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device. Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL. Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle. Select the ring tone. Turn HondaLink® Assist on and off. Continued 409 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 410 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phone menu screen 1. Select . 2. Select Phone. Recent Calls All Features Dialed Display the last outgoing calls. Missed Display the last missed calls. Received Favorite Contacts 410 Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls. Display the last incoming calls. (Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list. Contacts Display the paired phone’s phonebook. Keypad Enter a phone number to dial. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 411 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phone Setup ■ Bluetooth® setup You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select Options. 6. Select Bluetooth, then ON. Features Continued 411 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 412 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no Features 412 phone paired to the system) 1. Select . 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Connect Phone. 4. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then select + Connect New Device. u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth® device. 5. Select your phone when it appears on the list. u If your phone still does not appear, search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, search for HandsFree Link. 6. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone. 7. Select desired functions and then select Connect. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Continue or Connect without Internet. 1Phone Setup Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive handsfree calls. Phone Pairing Tips: • You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving. • Up to six phones can be paired. • Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to the system. • If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle. Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or more icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following: : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio. : The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone can be used with the internet tethering. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth compatible devices is unavailable and + Connect New Device is grayed out from the Bluetooth screen. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 413 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To change the currently paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 409 2. Select Change Connected Phone. 3. Select a phone to connect. u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone. 4. Select , or . 5. Select Apply. 2 Phone settings screen P. 409 2. Select Change Connected Phone. 3. Select a phone you want to delete. If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again. To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device from the Bluetooth screen. Features ■ To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 1To change the currently paired phone 4. Select Delete Device. 5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Delete. Continued 413 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 414 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Ring Tone 1Ring Tone You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 409 2. Select Ringtone. 3. Select Vehicle or Phone. Features ■ Automatic Transferring If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL. 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 409 2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer. 3. Select ON or OFF. 414 Vehicle: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 415 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History ■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On: When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system. ■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name. Mobile Work Home Other On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system. The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call. 2 Phone settings screen P. 409 2. Select Auto Sync Phone. 3. Select ON or OFF. Continued Features setting 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History 415 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 416 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Favorite Contacts To store a speed dial number: 1. Go to the phone menu screen. Recent Calls Screen 2 Phone menu screen P. 410 2. Select the Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad screen. 3. Select the star icon. u A notification appears on the screen if the speed dial is successfully stored. u To remove the speed dial, select the star icon again. Star Icon Contacts Screen Features Star Icon Keypad Screen Star Icon 416 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 417 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To edit a speed dial 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 410 2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you want to edit. 4. Select a setting you want. ■ To delete a speed dial 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 410 Continued Features 2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you want to delete. 4. Select Remove Contact. 5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Continue. 417 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 418 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Making a Call 1Making a Call You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, or speed dial entries. Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers. While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple CarPlay. Features 418 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 419 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using the imported phonebook 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 410 2. Select Contacts. 3. Select a name. u You can sort by First Name or Last Name. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen. 4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically. 2 Phone menu screen P. 410 Features ■ To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2. Select Keypad. 3. Select a number. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers. 4. Select Call. u Dialing starts automatically. Continued 419 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 420 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, and Received. 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 410 2. Select Recent Calls. u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen. 3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically. Features ■ To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 410 2. Select Favorite Contacts. u You can change the order of speed dial entries by selecting Reorder. 3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically. 420 1To make a call using the call history The call history appears only when a phone is connected to the system. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 421 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Receiving a Call 1Receiving a Call When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call... screen appears. Press the Press the call. button to answer the call. button to decline or end the Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the button again to return to the current call. Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call. ■ Options During a Call 1Options During a Call The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone. Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. The available options are shown on the lower Mute Icon half of the screen. Features You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons. Keypad: Available on some phones. You can select the icons on the audio/information screen. Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off. Continued 421 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 422 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To Set Up Text Message Options ■ To turn on or off the text message notice 1. Select . 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Notifications. 5. Select ON or OFF. Features 422 1To Set Up Text Message Options To use the text message function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone. 1To turn on or off the text message notice ON: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. OFF: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 423 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Receiving a Text Message 1Receiving a Text Message HFL can display newly received text messages as well as the last 20 messages received on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase. 1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message. 2. Select Open to display the message. u The text message is displayed. 3. Select Play to listen to the message. To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop. The system can only receive messages that are sent a text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list. With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 of the last text messages received. State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message feature. Only use the text message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely. Features Continued The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud. 423 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 424 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Selecting a Phone 1Selecting a Phone You can select one from the Bluetooth® device list to be active and receive notifications. 1. Select . 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Change Connected Phone. 5. Change a desired phone. 2 To change the currently paired phone P. 413 Features 424 You can only receive notifications from one phone at a time. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 425 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Displaying Messages Message List 1Displaying Messages The (blue) icon appears next to an unread message. 1. Select . 2. Select Messages. u Select a phone if necessary. 3. Select a message. u The text message is displayed. If you delete a message on the phone, the message will also be deleted from the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phone’s outbox. To see the previous or next message, select or Next on the message screen. Prev Text Message Features Continued 425 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 426 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Read or Stop reading a message 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Play. u The system starts reading the message aloud. 3. Select Pause to stop reading. Select Play again to start reading the message. ■ Reply to a message Features 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Reply. 3. Select the reply message. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 4. Select Send to send the message. u Message sent appears on the screen when the reply message was successfully sent. 1Reply to a message The available fixed reply messages are as follows: • Talk to you later, I’m driving. • I’m on my way. • I’m running late. • OK • Yes • No You can add a reply message by selecting + Create New Message. 2 To edit a reply message P. 427 Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones: • U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. • Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351. 426 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 427 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To edit a reply message 1. Select . 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Edit System Replies. 5. Select the reply message you want to edit or + Create New Message. u The on-screen keyboard screen is displayed. 6. Enter a reply message, and then select Save. Continued You can change the order of reply messages by selecting Reorder. Features ■ To delete a reply message 1. Select . 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Delete System Replies. 5. Select on the reply message you want to delete. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 6. Select Delete. 1To edit a reply message 427 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 428 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Call. Features 428 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 429 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ In Case of Emergency 1In Case of Emergency ■ Automatic collision notification If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink® operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected. Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink® Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation. You cannot use this emergency service when: • You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage areas. • There is a problem with the connecting devices, such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself. You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle. Features IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink® Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink® Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR. Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage. 1Automatic collision notification If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds. *1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not be sent to the operator. Continued 429 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 430 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To enable notification 1To enable notification 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 409 2. Select HondaLink Assist. 3. Select ON or OFF. Features 430 Setting options: • ON: Notification is available. • OFF: Disable the feature. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 431 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Manual operator connection * ASSIST Button 1Manual operator connection * If you need to talk to the HondaLink® operator in a situation where no airbag has deployed, you can manually connect to them by pressing the ASSIST button with the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON. 1. Open the cover attached to the ceiling console. 2. Press the ASSIST button. u You are connected to the HondaLink® operator. Do not press the button while driving. When you need to contact the operator, park the vehicle in a safe place. If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it automatically cancels the action after three minutes. If necessary, the cover can be broken to access the ASSIST button. Features * Not available on all models 431 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 432 ページ 432 ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 433 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Driving This chapter discusses driving and refueling. Before Driving................................... 434 Towing a Trailer................................ 440 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ..... 450 When Driving Starting the Engine .......................... 452 Automatic Transmission ................... 459 Shifting ............................................ 460 Auto Idle Stop.................................. 468 ECON Mode .................................... 474 Intelligent Traction Management * .... 475 Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System............ 477 Agile Handling Assist ....................... 479 Blind spot information System * ........... 480 * Not available on all models LaneWatchTM * .................................. 483 Intelligent Variable Torque Management (iVTM4TM) AWD System * ..................... 485 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist.......................... 486 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ......... 488 Honda Sensing® ................................ 490 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ....................................... 493 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)......... 505 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .. 518 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ....................................... 527 Front Sensor Camera ....................... 532 Radar Sensor.................................... 534 Braking Brake System ................................... 535 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 537 Brake Assist System ......................... 538 Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped ................................ 539 Parking Sensor System * ................... 541 Cross Traffic Monitor * ..................... 546 Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 550 Refueling Fuel Information .............................. 552 How to Refuel ................................. 553 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions................................ 555 433 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 434 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Before Driving Driving Preparation Check the following items before you start driving. ■ Exterior Checks • Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components. • Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked. • Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear. Driving 434 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 588 • Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside. 1Exterior Checks NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing. Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole. Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 435 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation ■ Interior Checks 1Interior Checks • Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 437 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 144 • Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too. Driving • Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking. • Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving. • If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur. • Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate. The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician. 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 188 2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions P. 194 • Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position. 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 185 2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 186 Continued 435 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 436 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation • Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. • Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt. 2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 40 • Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated. 2 Indicators P. 76 Driving 436 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 437 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit Maximum Load Limit The maximum load for your vehicle is 948 lbs (430 kg). 1Maximum Load Limit See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb. Label Example 3 WARNING Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed. Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in Continued Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle. 2 Specifications P. 642 Driving This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load. 2 Specifications P. 642 437 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 438 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Driving 438 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 439 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb. 1Maximum Load Limit Towing a Trailer: See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a tailer. 2 Towing a Trailer P. 440 Load Limits Example Example1 Max Load 948 lbs (430 kg) Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg) Cargo Weight 648 lbs (294 kg) Max Load 948 lbs (430 kg) Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg) Cargo Weight 198 lbs (90 kg) Example2 Driving 439 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 440 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Towing a Trailer Towing Preparation ■ Towing Load Limits 1Towing Load Limits Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving. ■ Total trailer weight Do not exceed the maximum allowable weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in or on it shown in the table. Towing loads in excess of this can seriously affect vehicle handling and performance and can damage the engine and drivetrain. Total Load Driving Number of occupants 2 3 4 5 AWD models with ATF cooler 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) 4,750 lbs (2,155 kg) 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 4,250 lbs (1,928 kg) AWD models without ATF cooler 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) 3,250 lbs (1,474 kg) 3,000 lbs (1,361 kg) 2,750 lbs (1,247 kg) 2WD models 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) 3,250 lbs (1,474 kg) 3,000 lbs (1,361 kg) 2,750 lbs (1,247 kg) Each weight limit is calculated based on the following conditions: • Occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back. • Each occupant weights 150 lbs (68 kg). • Each occupant has 17.6 lb (8 kg) cargo in the cargo area. Any additional weight, cargo or accessories reduce the maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load. 440 3 WARNING Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive. Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale. If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo distribution. Refer to the trailer owner’s manual for additional information. Break-in Period Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km). Never exceed the gross weight ratings. Gross weight information 2 Vehicle Specifications P. 642 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 441 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation ■ Tongue load The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer on the hitch should be approximately: Boat trailers: 5 – 15% of the total trailer weight Other trailers: 10 – 15% of total trailer weight Tongue Load AWD models with or without ATF cooler 500 lbs (227 kg) 475 lbs (215 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg) 425 lbs (193 kg) 2WD models 350 lbs (159 kg) 325 lbs (147 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg) 275 lbs (125 kg) Driving Number of occupants 2 3 4 5 Continued 441 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 442 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation ■ How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale Check each weight in the order indicated as shown. Refer to the table on the right for each weight’s limit except for the tongue load. 2 Tongue load P. 441 1. Front gross axle weight. 4. Gross combined weight. 2. Gross vehicle weight. 3. Rear gross axle weight. Driving 442 5. Hitched trailer weight. 6. Unhitched trailer weight. • If you cannot weigh the rear axle, subtract 1 from 2. • The maximum gross combined weight (4) decreases by 2% for every 1,000 feet (305 meters) of elevation. • To calculate the tongue load, subtract 5 from 6. • Refer to the trailer owner’s manual for additional information. 1How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale Fully load the vehicle and trailer. An attendant who watches the scale is needed as all occupants should stay in the vehicle. Weight limit for 2WD models 2,734 lbs Front gross axle (1,240 kg) 5,291 lbs Gross vehicle (2,400 kg) 2,965 lbs Rear gross axle (1,345 kg) 8,025 lbs Gross combined (3,640 kg) AWD models 2,855 lbs (1,295 kg) 5,291 lbs (2,400 kg) 3,141 lbs (1,425 kg) 9,755 lbs (4,425 kg) If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo distribution. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 443 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation ■ Towing Equipment and Accessories 1Towing Equipment and Accessories Towing generally requires a variety of supplemental equipment. To ensure the best quality, we recommend that you purchase Honda equipment whenever possible. Ground (Black) Consult your trailer maker for proper installation and setup of the equipment. Improper installation and setup can affect the handling, stability, and braking performance of your vehicle. Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation. The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician. Trailer packages and products: • Ball mount, hitch plug, hitch pin etc. • Wiring harness kit • Trailer hitch kit (jumper harness included) 2 Trailer brakes P. 443 • Automatic transmission cooler Are available at a dealer. Driving ■ Trailer brakes Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more: There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard. The 4-pin gray connector installed in your vehicle has all of the circuits required to install most electric trailer brake controllers. Have a qualified mechanic install your trailer Trailer brake controller connector’s terminals: brake controller following the trailer brake Electric Brake +B (Light Green) controller manufacturer’s instructions. Failure (Brown) (20A) to properly install the trailer brake controller may increase the distance it takes for you to stop your vehicle when towing a trailer. Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations. 1Trailer brakes Stop (Violet) The 4-pin gray connector is located under the instrument panel near the top of the parking brake pedal. Continued 443 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 444 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation Electric Brake (Brown) Ground (Black) Brake (20A) (Blue) 2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type B P. 632 Brake Lights (Sky Blue) Driving 444 The trailer hitch harness is used to install the controller for the electric trailer brakes. Insert the trailer brake fuse into the engine compartment sub fuse box. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 445 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation ■ Trailer light Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow. Pins’ wiring color codes and their purposes: +B Trailer Main (Red) 1Trailer light The trailer lighting connector is located behind the left side panel in the cargo area. Even if you are planning to use the non-Honda trailer lighting harness and converter, ask a dealer for the correct connector and pins. +B ELEC Brake (Brown) +B Trailer Charge (Sky Blue) Trailer Small Light (Red) Back Light (Brown) Stop Light (Beige) IG2 HAC (Light Green) Right Turn Signal (Green) Left Turn Signal (Blue) Driving We recommend that you have a dealer install a Honda wiring harness and converter. They are designed for your vehicle. ■ Hitches Read the trailer manufacturer’s instructions, and select the appropriate draw bar for the height of the trailer you will be towing. ■ Weight distribution hitches Your vehicle is designed to tow without the need for a load distributing hitch. If you wish to use one, please consult your trailer maker for proper installation and set-up. Improper set-up could degrade the handling, stability, and braking performance of your vehicle. Continued 445 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 446 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation ■ Safety chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground. ■ Sway control This device can be used if your trailer tends to sway. Your trailer maker can tell you what kind of sway control you need and how to install it. Improper installation could degrade the handling and stability of your vehicle. ■ Trailer mirrors Many states, provinces and territories require special exterior mirrors when towing a trailer. Install special mirrors whenever you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot. ■ Automatic transmission cooler Driving 446 AWD models An additional ATF (automatic transmission fluid) cooler is required to keep the transmission from overheating when towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg). You can get the additional ATF cooler at a dealer. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 447 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuTowing a TraileruTrailer Stability Assist Trailer Stability Assist Helps to stabilize the vehicle and trailer when the trailer severely sways. ■ How trailer stability assist works When the vehicle and trailer become unstable while driving, trailer stability assist determines the cause. If the trailer oscillation is detected as the cause, and the swaying increases, the system applies the brakes or controls engine output to reduce vehicle speed. Both the vehicle and trailer brake lights come on automatically if you brake to reduce vehicle speed. 1Trailer Stability Assist Trailer stability assist is not a function that prevents the vehicle and trailer from swaying. Avoid high speeds, abrupt steering, improper trailer load, and sudden braking to keep the trailer from swaying. When swayed too severely, the system becomes ineffective, and you may lose control of your vehicle, causing the trailer to roll over or get damaged. 2 Driving Safely with a Trailer P. 448 Trailer towing sway is caused by: • Crosswinds • Improper towbar down load • Excessive Speed Driving The VSA® system indicator blinks during the trailer stability assist operation. 2 VSA® Operation P. 477 447 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 448 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer Driving Safely with a Trailer ■ Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer • Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition. • Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits. 2 Towing Load Limits P. 440 Driving • When towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg), use of gasoline with a pump octane number of 87 or higher is recommended. u Towing performance can be affected by high altitude, high temperature, or steep uphill. • Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer. • Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while driving. • Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly. • Check the pressures of the trailer tires. • Turn off the Auto Idle Stop system using the Auto Idle Stop OFF button. The trailer weight can affect your vehicle's brake effectiveness if Auto Idle Stop is activated on a hill while towing a trailer. ■ Towing Speeds and Gears • Drive slower than normal. • Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers. • Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads. ■ Turning and Braking • Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal. • Allow more time and distance for braking. • Do not brake or turn suddenly. 448 1Driving Safely with a Trailer Operating speed when towing a trailer must not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h). Parking In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s tires. 1Towing Speeds and Gears When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds, the trailer may sway or affect vehicle handling. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 449 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle ■ Driving in Hilly Terrain • Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the white (Hot) mark, turn off the climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary. • Change the gear position to (S position if the transmission shifts frequently. ■ Retrieving a Boat If the vehicle tires slip when retrieving a boat from the water, keep the transmission in (D and do not use the sequential shift mode in (S . This prevents damage to the transmission. Towing Your Vehicle 2 Emergency Towing P. 636 Driving Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information. 449 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 450 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines General Information Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-highway activities. If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement. Important Safety Precautions To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and recommendations: • Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 437 Driving 450 • Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts. • Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow. • It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits. 1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines 3 WARNING Improperly operating this vehicle on or off pavement can cause a crash or rollover in which you and your passengers could be seriously injured or killed. • Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owner’s manual. • Keep your speed low, and don’t drive faster than conditions permit. Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover. 2 Important Handling Information P. 34 2 Precautions While Driving P. 458 Spinning the tires excessively can also damage the Intelligent VTM4 (i-VTM4TM) system. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 451 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble Avoiding Trouble Driving • Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures. • Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in a hazardous situation. • Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control. • Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover or damage to your suspension or other components. • Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually the safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it. Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill. • Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings. • If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose. 451 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 452 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 When Driving Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 1Starting the Engine Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine. The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters). 2. Depress the brake pedal. When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain. If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details. Driving If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system. Brake Pedal 3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal. 452 Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry remote is weak. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 620 The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is subjected to strong radio waves. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 453 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine ■ Stopping the Engine 1Starting the Engine Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine. If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before starting the engine again. You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped. 1. Put the transmission into (P . 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled. 2 Immobilizer System P. 158 Driving Continued 453 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 454 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine ■ Remote Engine Start 1Remote Engine Start You can remotely start the engine on using the smart entry remote. ■ To start the engine Press the button, then press and hold the button. Some exterior lights flash once. Go within the range, and try again. LED: Blinks when any button is pressed. Driving Some exterior lights flash six times if the engine runs successfully. Some exterior lights will not flash if the engine runs unsuccessfully. When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed simultaneously. 454 3 WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly enclosed areas. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you. Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or other areas with limited ventilation. If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference. The engine may not start by the remote engine start if: • You have disabled a remote engine start setting using the driver information interface. • The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). • The transmission is in a position other than (P . 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 455 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the button, then press and hold the button. u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was transmitted successfully. 1Remote Engine Start • The hood is open, or any door or the tailgate is unlocked. • You have already used the remote twice to start the engine. • Another registered smart entry remote is in the ■ To stop the engine vehicle. • There is any antenna failure. • The door is unlocked with the built-in key. • The engine oil pressure is low. • The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. • The telematics unit malfunctions. • The security system alarm is not set. Go within the range, and try again. The exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of the smart entry system range. The engine will not stop. The engine may stop while it is running if: • You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of remote. • There is any antenna failure. • The security system alarm is not set. • The door is unlocked with the built-in key. • The hood is open, or any door, or the tailgate is Press and hold the button for The exterior lights flash once if the engine stops successfully. one second. * Not available on all models Continued Driving starting the engine with the smart entry remote. • The engine is stopped by using the smart entry unlocked. • Any door is open. • The telematics unit * malfunction. • The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. • The battery is low. 455 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 456 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine 1Remote Engine Start • The engine oil pressure is low. • The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control systems. • The transmission is in a position other than (P . Driving While the engine is running, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is warm outside: • The climate control system is activated in recirculation mode. • The seat ventilation is activated *. When it is cold outside: • The defroster is activated at a moderately warm temperature. • The rear defogger and door mirror heaters * are activated. • The seat heaters * and heated steering wheel * are activated. 2 Heated Steering Wheel * P. 214 2 Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation * P. 212, 213 456 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 457 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine ■ Starting to Drive When the engine was started using the smart entry remote 1. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button simultaneously. When the engine was started in any case 2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator has gone off. 1Starting to Drive When the engine was started using the smart entry remote The engine stops when the transmission position is changed from (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive. 2 Parking Brake P. 535 3. Put the transmission into (D . Select (R when reversing. 4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Put the transmission into (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal. 1Hill start assist system Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines. Driving ■ Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator. Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake. Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off. 457 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 458 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving Precautions While Driving ■ Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control: • Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle. • Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible. • Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity. • Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof. Never carry more than 165 lbs (75 kg) of cargo on the roof rack (Honda accessory). ■ In Rain Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine, driveline, or cause electrical component failure. Driving ■ Other Precautions If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks. 1Precautions While Driving NOTICE Do not change the gear position while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission. NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system. If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle. Do not change the gear position to (N , as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance. During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine or powertrain. Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced. 458 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 459 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission Automatic Transmission ■ Creeping The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped. 1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover. 2 Important Handling Information P. 34 2 Precautions While Driving P. 458 ■ Kickdown Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves. Driving 459 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 460 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting Shifting Change the gear position in accordance with your driving needs. 1Shifting 3 WARNING ■ Shift button positions Park Used when parking or starting the engine Reverse Used when reversing Neutral Transmission is not locked Driving Drive/S Position Each time you press the D/S button, the mode switches between Drive and S position mode Used for: Drive ● ● Normal driving (gears change between 1st and 9th automatically) Temporarily driving in the sequential mode S Position ● ● Automatically changing gears between 1st and 8th (8th gear is used only at high speed) Driving in the sequential mode The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged. A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death. Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the gear position Indicator. To prevent malfunction and unintended engagement: • Do not spill any liquids on or around shift buttons. • Do not place or drop any objects on or around shift buttons. • Do not let passengers or children operate the shift buttons. The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when you depress the accelerator pedal with the gear position in (N . Change the gear position to (D or (R with the brake pedal depressed. When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (−22°F/−30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you are in the correct gear before driving. 460 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 461 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ (P (parking) button (P Button Park your vehicle in a safe place with the power mode in ON, then apply the brakes and press the (P button to put the transmission in Park. The indicators on the sides of the (P button come on. Driving Continued 461 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 462 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ Shift Operation 1Shift Operation NOTICE M (sequential mode) Indicator Tachometer’s Red Zone Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator Gear Position Indicator Driving Press the (P button. 462 Use the gear position indicator and the shift button indicator to check the gear position before selecting a shift button. If the indicator of the currently selected gear position, or all the gear position indicators are blinking simultaneously, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible. Press the (N button. The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt. Press the D/S button. Each time you press the button, the mode switches between Drive and S position mode. When the engine speed is increased while the transmission is in (N , (P or (R , the fuel supply may be cut off even without the engine speed entering the tachometer’s red zone. Pull back the (R button. Shift Button Indicator When you change (D to (R and visa versa, depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop, then select the intended gear position while maintaining brake pressure. From the driver information interface or audio/ information screen, you can choose to have the system activate a beeper when you change to (R . 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 2 Customized Features P. 359 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 463 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting In freezing or sub-freezing conditions, the electronic gear selector response may be slow. Always depress the brake pedal before changing the gear position to (P , and confirm that (P is shown on the gear position indicator before releasing the brake. ■ When opening the driver’s door If you open the driver’s door under the following conditions, the gear position automatically changes to (P . • The vehicle is stationary with the engine running, or moving at 1 mph (2 km/h) or slower. • The transmission is in other than (P . • You have unfastened the driver side seat belt. ■ When turning off the power mode If you turn the engine off while the vehicle is stationary, and the transmission is in other than (P , the gear position automatically changes to (P . Continued You should always select (P before opening the driver’s door. Make sure to park the vehicle in a safe place. 2 When Stopped P. 539 If you want to drive the vehicle after the gear position has automatically changed to (P under the described conditions, close the door, fasten the seat belt, depress the brake pedal, then change the gear position. If you leave the vehicle, turn off the engine and lock the doors. Driving u If you manually change the gear position from (P with the brake pedal depressed, the gear position will automatically return to (P once you release the brake pedal. 1When opening the driver’s door 463 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 464 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting Driving 464 ■ If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] With the engine running: 1. Press and hold the brake pedal. 2. Select (N , then release the button to display (Neutral) (N hold mode on the driver information interface. 3. Press and hold (N again for two seconds. u This puts the vehicle in car wash mode which must be used when your vehicle is pulled through a conveyor type automatic car wash where you or an attendant do not remain in the vehicle. If the ENGINE STOP/START button is pressed after car wash mode has been activated, the power mode will change to ACCESSORY and a message will be displayed on the driver information interface. u For 15 minutes the gear position remains in (N with the power mode in ACCESSORY. After that, the position automatically changes to (P and the power mode changes to OFF. u Manually changing to (P cancels ACCESSORY mode. The (P indicator comes on and the power mode changes to OFF. You must always shift to (P when car wash mode is no longer needed. 1 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] To keep the vehicle (N position, you can also follow this procedure: While the power mode is on, select (N , and then within five seconds, press the ENGINE STOP/START button. Note that the transmission may not stay in (N position while any of the following indicators is on: • Transmission system indicator. • Malfunction indicator lamp. • Charging system indicator. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 465 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ Restriction on selecting a gear position You cannot select a gear position under certain circumstances that may lead to a crash. When the transmission is in: 1. Under the circumstances of that: 2. You cannot select: 3. The gear position How to change the remains in/changes to: gear position The brake pedal is not depressed. (P (P The accelerator pedal is depressed. The vehicle is moving at low speed without the brake pedal depressed. Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal. Other gear position (N (N (N , (D or (S The vehicle is moving forward. (R (R or (N The vehicle is moving backward. (D , (S (R , (N , (D or (S The vehicle is moving. (P Stop your vehicle in a safe place, keep the brake pedal pressed, and select the appropriate gear position. Continued Driving The vehicle is moving at low speed with the accelerator pedal depressed. 465 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 466 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ Sequential Mode Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 9th gears without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential mode. ■ When the transmission is in (D : The vehicle will go into the sequential mode momentarily, and the sequential mode gear selection indicator will come on. Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential mode will automatically switch off, and the sequential mode gear selection indicator will go off. Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds or push D/S button to return to normal drive. ■ When the transmission is in (S Driving 466 The vehicle will go into the sequential mode, and the M (sequential mode) indicator and sequential mode gear selection indicator will come on. If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up to the next gear. You can cancel this mode by holding the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds or push D/S button. When the sequential mode is canceled, the sequential mode indicator and sequential mode gear selection indicator go off. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 467 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ Sequential Mode Operation Paddle Shifter (Shift down) 1Sequential Mode Operation Paddle Shifter (Shift up) Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear change. To change gears continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next gear. If the sequential mode gear selection indicator blinks when you try to shift up or down, this means your vehicle speed is not in its allowable gear range or the protection of transmission system is necessary. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking. Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator Driving Downshifting when pulling the paddle shifter. (Changes to a lower gear) Upshifting when pulling the paddle shifter. (Changes to a higher gear) 467 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 468 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop Auto Idle Stop To help maximize fuel economy, the engine automatically stops when the vehicle comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions. The indicator (green) comes on at this time. The engine then restarts once the vehicle is about to move again, or depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions, and the indicator (green) goes off. 2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When P. 472 A message associated with Auto Idle Stop appears on the driver information interface. 2 Indicators P. 76 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 2 Customized Features P. 359 Driving 468 If the driver’s door is opened while the indicator (green) comes on, a buzzer sounds to notify you that the Auto Idle Stop function is in operation. 1Auto Idle Stop The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type may shorten the 12-volt battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the 12-volt battery, make sure to select the specified type. Ask a dealer for more details. The duration of the Auto Idle Stop operation: • Increases in the ECON mode, compared to when the ECON mode is off, with climate control in use. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 469 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop ■ Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber) 1Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF To turn the Auto Idle Stop system off, press this button. The Auto Idle Stop system stops. u Auto Idle Stop system will stop and the indicator (Amber) will come on. The Auto Idle Stop system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle. ■ Auto Idle Stop Activates When: Press the Auto Idle Stop OFF button to restart the engine from the idling stop. 1Auto Idle Stop Activates When: ■ Auto Idle Stop does not activate when: • • • • • The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed. The driver’s seat belt is not fastened. The engine coolant temperature is low or high. The transmission fluid temperature is low or high. The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h) after the engine starts. • Stopped on a steep incline. • A gear position other than (D . Continued Do not open a hood, during idling stop. If the hood is opened, the engine will not restart automatically. In this case, restart the engine with the ENGINE START/STOP button. 2 Starting the Engine P. 452 Driving The vehicle stops with the gear position in (D and the brake pedal depressed. When you put the transmission into (P , the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate, even if the brake pedal is released. u If you change the gear position, the engine may automatically restarts. Pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button changes the power mode to ACCESSORY even while Auto Idle Stop is in operation. Once in ACCESSORY, the engine no longer restarts automatically. Follow the standard procedure to start the engine. 2 Starting the Engine P. 452 469 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 470 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop • The engine is started with the hood open. u Turn off the engine. Close the hood before you restart the engine to activate Auto Idle Stop. • The battery charge is low. • The internal temperature of the battery is 14°F (−10°C) or less. • The climate control system is in use, and the outside temperature is below −4°F (−20°C) or over 104°F (40°C). • The climate control system is in use, and the temperature is set to Hi or Lo. • is ON (indicator on). • The rear fan is set to maximum speed. u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate control system */rear cooling * is in use. • When the Intelligent Traction Management is set to Snow, Mud *, or Sand *. Driving 470 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 471 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop ■ Auto Idle Stop may not activate when: • • • • • The vehicle is stopped by braking suddenly. The steering wheel is operated. The fan speed is high. Altitude is high. The climate control system is in use, and there is a significant difference between the set temperature and the actual interior temperature. • The climate control system is in use, and humidity in the interior is high. • The rear fan is set to maximum speed. u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate control system */rear cooling * is in use. Driving * Not available on all models Continued 471 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 472 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop ■ The Engine Automatically Restarts When The brake pedal is released. ■ The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed when: Driving 472 • The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed. • When a steering wheel is operated. • The transmission is put into (R or (S , or when it is set from (N to (D . u If you put the transmission into (P after the Auto Idle Stop activates, the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate. In this case, the engine restarts when you change the gear position other than (P . When changing the gear position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed. • The pressure on the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while stopped on an incline. • The pressure on the brake pedal is repeatedly applied and released slightly during a stop. • The battery charge becomes low. • The accelerator pedal is depressed. • The driver’s seat belt is unlatched. • is ON (indicator on). • The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant. • The climate control system is being used to dehumidify the interior. • The rear fan is set to maximum speed. u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate control system is in use. • When the Intelligent Traction Management is set to Snow, Mud *, or Sand *. * Not available on all models 1The Engine Automatically Restarts When If you are using an electronic device during Auto Idle Stop, the device may temporarily be turned off when the engine restarts. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 473 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop ■ Starting Assist Brake Function Briefly keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal to restart the engine. This can keep your vehicle from unexpectedly moving while on an incline. Driving 473 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 474 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguECON Mode ECON Mode The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off. The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, air conditioning system, and cruise control. Driving 474 1ECON Mode While in ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuations. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 475 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguIntelligent Traction Management * Intelligent Traction Management * The Intelligent Traction Management optimizes vehicle performance to help you drive on various surfaces. The system has available modes to select from: Normal, Snow, Mud *, and Sand *. Press the mode button to select the appropriate mode. The mode you select appears on the driver information interface. When the vehicle is turned off and restarted, Intelligent Traction Management mode will revert to Normal. 1Intelligent Traction Management * Refer to the Off-Highway Driving section for driving tips and safety precautions. 2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 450 AWD models Normal Provides balanced driving performance on most road surfaces. Driving Snow Use when driving on snowy road surfaces. Mud Use when driving on muddy road or offroad surfaces. Mode Button * Not available on all models Sand Use when driving on soft, sandy road or off-road surfaces. 475 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 476 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguIntelligent Traction Management * 2WD models Normal Provides balanced driving performance on most road surfaces. Snow Use when driving on snowy road surfaces. Snow Button Driving 476 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 477 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes. ■ VSA® Operation When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic system. You will also see the indicator blink. 1Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified. When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. VSA® System Indicator Driving VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety. The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function. Continued 477 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 478 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System ■ VSA® On and Off This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA® functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep. VSA® OFF Indicator The traction control stops fully functioning, allowing the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. The VSA® OFF indicator will also come on and a message on the driver information interface informs you that the mode is changed. AWD models Driving Traction control mode can not be changed during Mud or Sand modes. If you are driving on mud or sand, Mud or Sand Intelligent Traction Management modes can also be used to free a stuck vehicle. On other road surfaces, change to Normal or Snow mode, then press and hold the (VSA® OFF) button. To restore VSA® functionality/features, press the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a beep. VSA® is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle. 478 1Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System With the button pressed, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA® traction and stability enhancement becomes less effective. In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off. When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on. Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off. You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 479 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist Agile Handling Assist Lightly brakes each of the front and rear wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering. 1Agile Handling Assist The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety. When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate. You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal. Driving 479 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 480 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System * Blind spot information System * Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle, particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as “blind spots”. When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you change lanes. ■ How the system works ● Driving 480 Alert Zone A B C * Not available on all models 3 WARNING Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death. Do not rely only on the blind spot information system when changing lanes. Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes. ● The transmission is in (D . Your vehicle speed is between 20 mph (32 km/h) Radar Sensors: and 100 mph (160 km/h) underneath the Alert zone range rear bumper corners A: Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) B: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m) C: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m) 1Blind spot information System * Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, blind spot information system has limitations. Over reliance on blind spot information system may result in a collision. The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the following situations may occur. • The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even without the Blind Spot Info Not Available driver information interface appearing. • The blind spot information system alert indicator may come on even with the message appearing. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 481 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System * ■ When the system detects a vehicle Comes On Blinks 1Blind spot information System * Blind spot information System Alert Indicator: Located near the piller on both sides. Comes on when: • A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind to overtake you with a speed difference of no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your vehicle. • You pass a vehicle with a speed difference of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Blinks and a beeper sounds when: You move the turn signal lever in the direction of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds three times. The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on under the following conditions: • A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more than two seconds. • A vehicle is parked in a side lane. • The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h). • An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle. • A vehicle running in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle. The system does not operate when in (R . Driving You can turn off the audible alert, or all the blind spot information system alert using the audio/information screen. 2 Customized Features P. 359 Turn the system off when towing a trailer. The system may not work properly for the following reasons: • The added mass tilts the vehicle and changes the radar coverage. • The trailer itself can be detected by the radar sensors, causing the blind spot information system alert indicators to come on. * Not available on all models Continued 481 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 482 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System * 1Blind spot information System * Blind spot information system may be adversely affected when: • Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc,.) are detected. • An object that does not reflect radio waves well, such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone. • Driving on a curved road. • A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane. • The system picks up external electrical interference. • The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. • The orientation of the sensors has been changed. • In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog). For a proper blind spot information system operation: Driving • Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. • Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind. • Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired, or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted. 482 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 483 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM * LaneWatchTM * LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while driving. The system activates when you: Move the turn signal lever to the passenger side. Press the LaneWatch button. The passenger side view display appears on the audio/information screen. * Not available on all models Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death. Do not rely only on LaneWatch while driving. Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes. Driving Press the LaneWatch button again. Audio/Information Screen 3 WARNING Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in a collision. The system deactivates when you: Pull the turn signal lever back. 1LaneWatchTM * The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather, lighting (including headlights and low sun angle), ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading. The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display of traffic to the side and rear under the following conditions: • Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered, changing the height of the vehicle. • Your tires are over or under inflated. • Your tires or wheels are of varied size or construction. Camera Continued 483 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 484 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM * ■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen. • Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when you operate the turn signal light lever. • Show Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch monitor. • Display: Adjusts display settings. 1LaneWatchTM * The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique lens makes objects on the screen slightly look different from what they are. LaneWatch display does not come on when the gear position is changed to (R . For proper LaneWatch operation: 2 Customized Features P. 359 • The camera is located in the passenger side door ■ Reference Lines Driving Three lines that appear on the screen can give an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on the screen are from your vehicle, respectively. If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates that it is close to your vehicle whereas an object near line 3 is farther away. mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris. • Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers of any kind. • Do not touch the camera lens. 1Reference Lines The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm the safety of a lane change before changing lanes. The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and 3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines on the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more heavily loaded. Consult a dealer if: • The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is severely impacted, resulting in changing the camera angle. • The LaneWatch display does not come on at all. 484 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 485 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguIntelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System * Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System * The intelligent variable torque management (i-VTM4TM) AWD system is a full time all wheel drive system that automatically controls and transfers varying amount of engine torque to all wheels independently according to the driving conditions. You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle. Avoid continuously driving on slippery surfaces where a wheel is likely to spin out, and do not drive if the AWD indicator starts blinking. Driving continuously under such conditions can damage the system's torque distribution unit. * Not available on all models NOTICE Do not continuously spin the front tires of your vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can cause transmission or rear differential damage. The intelligent variable torque management (i-VTM4TM) AWD system may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified. 2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 594 Driving If the AWD indicator blinks while driving, it indicates the differential temperature is too high. If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to park, an idle the engine idle until the indicator goes out. If the indicator does not go out, take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. 1 Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System * 485 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 486 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist Monitors the tire pressure while you are driving. If your vehicle’s tire pressure becomes significantly low, the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator comes on and a message appears on the driver information interface. 1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator to come on. 2 If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks P. 630 Driving Tire pressure checked and inflated in: • Warm weather can become under-inflated in colder weather. • Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer weather. The Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation. The TPMS audibly and visually informs you of changes in tire pressure of the individual tire that you are adjusting using audible and visual indications. If a change in tire pressure has been significant, the system beeps and the hazard lights flash continuously for five seconds when the specified tire pressure is reached. Stop filling the tire. 486 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 487 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist ■ Tire Pressure Monitor 1Tire Pressure Monitor To select the tire pressure monitor, please follow the following steps using the buttons on the steering wheel. 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the (home) button. 3. Press the 3 / 4 button repeatedly until Maintenance appears. 4. Press the ENTER button and select Tire Pressure by pressing the 3 / 4 button. 5. Press the ENTER button and the tire pressure appears on the driver information interface. Tire Pressures Low is displayed when a tire has significantly low pressure. The specific tire is displayed on the screen. Tire Pressure Monitor Problem may appear if you drive with the compact spare tire, or there is a problem with the TPMS. Driving The pressure for each tire is displayed in psi. The pressure displayed on the driver information interface can be slightly different from the actual pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a significant difference between the two values, or if the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator and the message on the driver information interface do not go off after you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure, have the system checked by a dealer. 487 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 488 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale Driving when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. 488 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 489 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Driving When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. 489 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 490 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Honda Sensing® Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located behind the emblem and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror. Honda Sensing® has following functions. ■ The functions which do not require switch operations to activate • Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBS)TM 2 P. 493 • Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System 2 P. 527 ■ The functions which require switch operations to activate • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 2 P. 505 • Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 518 Driving 490 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 491 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®u ■ Operation Switches for the ACC/LKAS CANCEL Button Interval Button ■ MAIN Button Press to activate standby mode for ACC and LKAS. Or press to cancel these systems. ■ LKAS Button Press to activate or cancel the LKAS. MAIN button RES/+ Button LKAS Button ■ RES/+/−/SET Button Press RES/+ to resume the ACC or increase the vehicle speed. Press −/SET to set the ACC or decrease the vehicle speed. −/SET Button Driving ■ Interval Button Press the (interval) button to change the ACC following-interval. ■ CANCEL Button Press to cancel ACC. Continued 491 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 492 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®u ■ Multi-Information Display Content You can see the current state of ACC and LKAS. a Indicates that ACC and LKAS are ready to be activated. b Indicates that LKAS is activated and whether or not traffic lane lines are detected. c Indicates whether or not a vehicle is detected ahead. Driving 492 d Shows the set vehicle speed. e Shows the set vehicle interval. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 493 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable. ■ How the system works 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Important Safety Reminder The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent a collision nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions. When to use The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions: 2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 497 The camera is located behind the rearview mirror. For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page. 2 Radar Sensor P. 534 Driving You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 1How the system works The radar sensor is behind the emblem. The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you. The CMBSTM activates when: ● The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision. ● Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you. Continued Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you when the your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph (30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle detected in front of you. When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined. 493 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 494 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ When the system activates 1When the system activates The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.) Visual Alerts The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list. 2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 497 Beep Driving Audible Alert Tactile Alert At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/ Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through the driver information interface or the audio/information screen setting options. 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 2 Customized Features P. 359 ■ Vibration alert on the steering wheel When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and audible alerts. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the steering wheel, etc.). 494 1Vibration alert on the steering wheel Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on. 2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 91 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 495 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ Collision Alert Stages The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage. CMBSTM Distance between vehicles Stage one Normal Long Short Vehicle Ahead Your Vehicle Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead Audible & Visual WARNINGS When in Long, visual and audible alerts come on at a There is a risk of a collision longer distance from a vehicle with the vehicle ahead of ahead than in Normal setting, you. and in Short, at a shorter distance than in Normal. The risk of a collision has increased, time to respond is reduced. Steering Wheel In case of an oncoming vehicle detected, rapid vibration is provided. Braking — — Lightly applied — Forcefully applied Driving Stage two The sensors detect a vehicle Visual and audible alerts. Stage three Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead The CMBS determines that a collision is unavoidable. TM Continued 495 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 496 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ CMBSTM On and Off 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Press and hold the button until the beeper sounds to switch the system on or off. When the CMBSTM is off: • The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument panel comes on. • A message on the driver information interface reminds you that the system is off. The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle. Driving 496 The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain conditions: 2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 497 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 497 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 ■ Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between objects and the background. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel. Driving • • • • • • • • • ■ Roadway conditions • Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). • The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. • Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads. Continued 497 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 498 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ Vehicle conditions • • • • • • • • • • Driving 498 Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). When tire chains are installed. The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. The camera temperature gets too high. Driving with the parking brake applied. When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty. The vehicle is towing a trailer. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 499 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Continued Driving ■ Detection limitations • A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. • The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is too short. • A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. • When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you at high speed. • The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small vehicle. • When there are animals in front of your vehicle. • When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. • The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of you is significantly large. • An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. • Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc. • Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. • When driving through a narrow iron bridge. • When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down. 499 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 500 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only • When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side. • Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian. • When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2 meters) in height. • When a pedestrian blends in with the background. • When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or they are running. • When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group. • When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size). Driving 500 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 501 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ Automatic shutoff CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the CMBSTM indicator comes and stays on when: • The temperature inside the system is high. • You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period. • An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.). • The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty. Once the conditions that caused CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on. Driving Continued 501 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 502 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ With Little Chance of a Collision The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are: ■ When Passing Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass. ■ At an intersection Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn. Driving 502 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently). 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 503 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ On a curve When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you. Driving ■ Through a low bridge at high speed You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed. Continued 503 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 504 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc. You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls. Driving 504 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 505 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator. 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 3 WARNING Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash. Use ACC only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good weather conditions. When to use The camera is located behind the rearview mirror. 3 WARNING ACC has limited braking capability. Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal when conditions require. ■ Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a ACC can not be activated if Intelligent Traction Management setting is snow, sand * or mud *. range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~ ■ Gear positions for adaptive cruise control: In (D or (S * Not available on all models Driving The radar sensor is behind the emblem. When your vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will automatically cancel and no longer will apply your vehicle's brakes. Continued 505 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 506 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ How to activate the system 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Important Reminder As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles. How to use ACC is on in the driver information interface. Adaptive cruise control is ready to use. You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM). 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 493 ■ Press the MAIN button on Driving 506 the steering wheel. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 507 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ To Set the Vehicle Speed 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) –/SET Button ACC may not work properly under certain conditions. 2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 510 When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS). When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned on or off. On when adaptive cruise control begins Press and release Continued Do not use ACC under the following conditions: • On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in continuous stop and go traffic. • On roads with sharp turns. • On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed. • On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access. Driving Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC begins. When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon, Set Vehicle Set Vehicle distance bars and set speed appear on the Speed Interval driver information interface. You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface between mph and km/h. 2 Units P. 114 507 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 508 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ When in Operation 1When in Operation ■ There is a vehicle ahead ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in front of you, the beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface. 2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 513 ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m) Driving When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down. A vehicle icon appears on the driver information interface. 508 Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead. Beep 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 509 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ There is no vehicle ahead A vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the driver information interface. 1When in Operation Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal. If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it. You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting. 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 2 Customized Features P. 359 Limitations You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not work properly under certain conditions. 2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 510 Continued Driving ■ When you depress the accelerator pedal You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alerts even if a vehicle is in ACC range. ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes the set speed. Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances: • The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle. • A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles. 509 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 510 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ ACC Conditions and Limitations The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions. 1ACC Conditions and Limitations If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN button and take your vehicle to a dealer. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 ■ Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). ■ Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). ■ Vehicle conditions Driving 510 • The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. • An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). • The camera temperature gets too high. • The parking brake is applied. • When the front grille is dirty. • The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. • When tire chains are installed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently). 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 511 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ Detection limitations • • • • A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you. The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short. A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high speed. • The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle. • When there are animals in front of your vehicle. • When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. Driving • The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is significantly large. • An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. • Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. Continued 511 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 512 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • When driving through a narrow iron bridge. • When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly. • When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape. Radar detects upper section of an empty carrier truck. Panel truck, tanker truck, etc. Driving • When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane. 512 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 513 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed 1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or −/SET buttons on the steering wheel. If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface between mph and km/h. 2 Units P. 114 To increase speed You can set the vehicle speed using the −/SET button on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake pedals. To decrease speed Driving • Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly. • If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly. ■ To Set or Change Following-interval Interval Button Press the (Interval) button to change the ACC following-interval. Each time you press the button, the followinginterval (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through short, middle, long, and extra long followinginterval. Continued 513 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 514 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Determine the most appropriate following-interval setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-interval requirements set by local regulation. The higher vehicle's following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference. When the Set Speed is: Following-interval Driving 514 50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h) Short 83 feet 25 meters 1.1 sec 100 feet 31 meters 1.1 sec Middle 110 feet 33 meters 1.5 sec 137 feet 42 meters 1.5 sec Long 154 feet 47 meters 2.1 sec 200 feet 61 meters 2.1 sec Extra Long 204 feet 62 meters 2.8 sec 265 feet 81 meters 2.8 sec 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 515 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ To Cancel CANCEL Button 1To Cancel To cancel ACC, do any of the following: • Press the CANCEL button. • Press the MAIN button. u ACC indicator goes off. • Depress the brake pedal. MAIN Button Continued The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed. 1Automatic cancellation Even though ACC has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then press the RES/+ button. Driving ■ Automatic cancellation The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to automatically cancel: • Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). • When the radar sensor behind the emblem gets dirty. • The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected. • An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. • Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods. • Abrupt steering wheel movement. • When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated. • When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on. • When you manually apply the parking brake. • When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle. • The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty. Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. 515 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 516 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ To Switch ACC to Cruise Control ACC ON Cruise Control ON Press and hold the (interval) button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise. To switch back to ACC, press and hold the button again for one second. ■ When to use Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~. Driving ■ To Set the Vehicle Speed Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. ■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). If you keep the RES/+ or –/SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set. 516 1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 517 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ To Cancel To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: • Press the CANCEL button. • Press the MAIN button. • Depress the brake pedal. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off. 1To Cancel Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. You cannot set or resume in the following situations: • When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h). • When the MAIN button is turned off. At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control canceled automatically. Driving 517 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 518 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane. ■ Steering input assist The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines. ■ Tactile and visual alerts ■ Front sensor camera Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the Monitors the lane vehicle is drifting out of a detected lines lane. 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Important Safety Reminders The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a substitute for your vehicle control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle. 2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 91 Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the front windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes. Driving The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions. The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways. The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions: 2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 524 When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off. If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering. The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves. You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 518 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 519 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ Lane Keep Support Function 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger. When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as warning display. Driving ■ Lane Departure Warning Function When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically. Warning Area Warning Area Continued 519 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 520 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ When the System can be Used The system can be used when the following conditions are met. • The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and your vehicle is in the center of the lane. • The vehicle speed is between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). • You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. • The turn signals are off. • The brake pedal is not depressed. • The wipers are not in high speed operation. ■ How to activate the system MAIN Button Driving LKAS Button 520 1. Press the MAIN button. u The LKAS is on in the driver information interface. The system is ready to use. 2. Press the LKAS button. u Lane outlines appear on the driver information interface. The system is activated. 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 521 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The dotted outer lines change to solid ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings. ■ To Cancel MAIN Button 1To Cancel LKAS Button Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off. To cancel the LKAS: Press the MAIN or LKAS button. Continued Driving The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle. 521 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 522 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ The system operation is suspended if When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the driver information interface change to contour lines, and the beeper sounds (if activated). Driving 522 you: • Set the wipers to HI. u Turning the wipers off resumes the LKAS. • Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph (64 km/h) or less. u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS. • Depress the brake pedal. u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal. • Your vehicle is driving to the right or the left of the lane. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 523 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ The LKAS may automatically be suspended when: • • • • • The system fails to detect lane lines. The steering wheel is quickly turned. You fail to steer the vehicle. Driving through a sharp curve. Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h). Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes. ■ The LKAS may automatically be canceled when: • The camera temperature gets extremely high or low. • The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty. • The ABS or VSA® system engages. Driving The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled. Continued 523 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 524 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ LKAS Conditions and Limitations The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following: ■ Environmental conditions Driving 524 • • • • • • • • • • Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 525 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ Roadway conditions • Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). • Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. • Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings. Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks • The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk). • The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. Driving Very wide or narrow traffic lane • • • • The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines). Continued 525 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 526 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) • Driving on roads with double lines. Lane void of lines at junction ■ Vehicle conditions Driving 526 • Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. • The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. • The inside of the windshield is fogged. • The camera temperature gets too high. • An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). • The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. • The vehicle is towing a trailer. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 527 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether. ■ How the System Works The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane. As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the driver information interface. If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking. u Braking is applied only when the lane markings are solid continuous lines. The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings. Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations. Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane. The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions. You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 532 Driving 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 2 Customized Features P. 359 1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions: 2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 530 There are times when you may not notice RDM functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions. If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you. Continued 527 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 528 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ■ How the System Activates The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the following conditions are met: • The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). • The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. • The turn signals are off. • The brake pedal is not depressed. • The wipers are not in continuous operation. • The vehicle is not accelerating or braking, and the steering wheel is not being turned. • The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating, braking or steering. Driving 528 1How the System Activates The RDM system may automatically shut off and the indicator comes and stays on. 2 Indicators P. 76 RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is: • Not driven within a traffic lane. • Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of a lane. • Driven in a narrow lane. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 529 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ■ RDM On and Off RDM Button Indicator 1RDM On and Off Press the RDM button to turn the system on and off. u The indicator in the button comes on and the message appears on the driver information interface when the system is on. When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the driver information interface or audio/information screen, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking. 2 Vehicle Customization P. 119 2 Customized Features P. 359 Driving Continued 529 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 530 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ■ RDM Conditions and Limitations The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. ■ Environmental conditions Driving 530 • • • • • • • • • • Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 531 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ■ Roadway conditions • Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). • Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. • Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings. • The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk). • The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. • The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. • The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. • Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. • When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines). • Driving on roads with double lines. Driving ■ Vehicle conditions • Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. • The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. • The inside of the windshield is fogged. • The camera temperature gets too high. • An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). • The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. • When tire chains are installed. • The vehicle is towing a trailer. 531 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 532 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera Front Sensor Camera The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, and CMBSTM, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions. ■ Camera Location and Handling Tips Front Sensor Camera Driving 532 This camera is located behind the rearview mirror. To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it. 1Front Sensor Camera Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera’s field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly. Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 533 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera 1Front Sensor Camera If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears: • Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera. • Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera. Driving If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears: • Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 533 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 534 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuHonda Sensing®uRadar Sensor Radar Sensor The radar sensor is behind the emblem. 1Radar Sensor Avoid strong impacts to the radar sensor cover. For the CMBSTM to work properly: The radar sensor is located behind the emblem. Always keep the radar sensor cover clean. Radar Sensor Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent. Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover. Driving If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by using the safety support switch and take your vehicle to a dealer. 2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 496 If the vehicle is involved in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer: • Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision • Your vehicle drives through deep water or is submerged in deep water • Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock, or embankment that could jar the radar sensor 534 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 535 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Braking Brake System ■ Parking Brake 1Parking Brake Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking. To apply: Depress the parking brake pedal down with your foot. NOTICE Release the parking brake fully before driving. The rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive with the parking brake applied. If you start driving without fully releasing the parking brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release Parking Brake appears on the driver information interface. Always apply the parking brake when parking. To release: 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Depress the parking brake. Driving Continued 535 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 536 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBrakinguBrake System ■ Foot Brake Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard. 2 Brake Assist System P. 538 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 537 1Foot Brake Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times. If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc. Driving Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear. Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you. 536 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 537 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ■ ABS Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you. The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading. You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as “stomp and steer.” ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on: • Wet or snow covered roads. • Roads paved with stone. • Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc. When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops. NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the wrong size or type. If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control. In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS: • You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces, such as gravel or snow. • The tires are equipped with snow chains. Driving ■ ABS operation The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice. 1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) The following may be observed with the ABS system: • Motor sounds coming from the engine compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while the vehicle accelerates. • Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when ABS activates. These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern. 537 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 538 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBrakinguBrake Assist System Brake Assist System Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking. ■ Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking. When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down. Driving 538 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 539 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Change the gear position to (P . 4. Turn off the engine. 1Parking Your Vehicle 3 WARNING The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged. Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline. A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death. Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the gear position Indicator. 1When Stopped Driving Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire. NOTICE The following can damage the transmission: • Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. • Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by depressing the accelerator pedal. • Changing into (P before the vehicle stops completely. Continued 539 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 540 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuParking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped 1When Stopped In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving. If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash. Driving 540 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 541 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System * Parking Sensor System * The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles near your vehicle, and the beeper and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle. ■ The sensor location and range Front Corner Sensors Rear Corner Sensors Rear Center Sensors 1Parking Sensor System * Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking. The system may not work properly when: • The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or dirt. • The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass, bumps, or a hill. • The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather. • The system is affected by devices that emit ultrasonic waves. • Driving in bad weather. The system may not sense: or sponge. Within about 26 in (65 cm) or less Within about 45 in (115 cm) or less • Objects directly under the bumper. Driving • Thin or low objects. • Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton, Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors. * Not available on all models Continued 541 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 542 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System * ■ Parking sensor system on and off With the power mode in ON, press the parking sensor system button to turn on or off the system. The indicator in the button comes on when the system is on. The front corner, rear center and rear corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is in (R , and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). The front corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is not in (P , and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). Driving 542 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 543 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System * ■ Screen Operation 1Screen Operation You can switch between split view off and split view on by touching the split screen tab. Split View Off The split screen tab disappears, and the split view returns to the last camera view mode under the following conditions: • If the parking sensor system is turned off. • If there is a malfunction in the system. Split Screen Tab Split View On Driving Continued 543 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 544 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System * ■ When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles becomes shorter Length of the intermittent beep Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle Indicator Corner Sensors Center Sensors Moderate — Rear: About 45-26 in (115-65 cm) Short About 26-19 in (65-50 cm) About 26-19 in (65-50 cm) Very short About 19-16 in (50-40 cm) About 19-16 in (50-40 cm) Continuous About 16 in (40 cm) About 16 in (40 cm) Audio/information screen Blinks in Yellow*1 Blinks in Amber Driving 544 *1: At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles. Indicators light where the sensor detects an obstacle Blinks in Red 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 545 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System * ■ Turning off All Rear Sensors 1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). 2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON. 3. Keep pressing the button for 10 seconds. Release the button when the indicator in the button flashes. 4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off. u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off. 1Turning off All Rear Sensors When you set the gear position to (R , the indicator in the parking sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off. To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds three times when the rear sensors come back on. Driving 545 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 546 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor * Cross Traffic Monitor * Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected. The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space. 1Cross Traffic Monitor * 3 CAUTION Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not detect an approaching vehicle at all. Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing so may result in a collision. Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing. Driving 546 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 547 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor * ■ How the System Works 1Cross Traffic Monitor * The system activates when: • The power mode is in ON. • The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on. 2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 549 • The transmission is in (R . • Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or lower. Radar sensors: Underneath the rear bumper corners The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly behind your vehicle. The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects. Driving When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning. Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without an approaching vehicle under the following conditions: • An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall, near your vehicle's rear bumper, is blocking the radar sensor's scope. • Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph (5 km/h) or higher. • A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than between about 6 and 16 mph (10 and 25 km/h). • The system picks up external interference such as other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby. • Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with snow, ice, mud or dirt. • When there is bad weather. • Your vehicle is on an incline. • Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear. • Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a vehicle, and so on. The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. Have a vehicle checked by a dealer. For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind. * Not available on all models Continued 547 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 548 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor * ■ When the System Detects a Vehicle 1When the System Detects a Vehicle If the on the lower right changes to in amber when the transmission is in (R , mud, snow or ice, etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean the area if necessary. Arrow Icon Normal View Wide View Top Down View An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information screen. Driving 548 If the comes on when the transmission is in (R , there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the display remains the same with the transmission in (R , there may be a problem with the rear camera system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 549 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor * ■ Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off You can switch on and off the system using the audio/information screen. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Camera. 4. Select Rear Camera. 5. Select Cross Traffic Monitor. 6. Select ON or OFF. The system can also be turned on and off on the audio/information screen by pressing the CTM icon. Driving Icon 549 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 550 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Multi-View Rear Camera About Your Multi-View Rear Camera The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display automatically changes to a rear view when the gear position is changed to (R . ■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area Wide View Mode Approx. 39 inches (1 m) Approx. 20 inches (50 cm) Tailgate Open Range The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are. Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle. Normal View Mode If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris. Bumper Driving Guidelines Camera 1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera Models with color audio system Top Down View Mode You can change the Camera Guideline On or Off settings. 2 Customized Features P. 352 Models with Display Audio You can change the Fixed, Dynamic, Both and OFF settings. 2 Customized Features P. 359 Fixed: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R . Dynamic: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. Both: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R and Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. OFF: Guidelines do not appear. 550 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 551 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera You can view three different camera modes on the audio/information screen. Models with color audio system Press the selector knob to switch the angle. Models with Display Audio Select the appropriate icon to switch the angle. : Wide view mode : Normal view mode : Top down view mode Models with Display Audio You can change the Last Used, Normal View and Wide View settings. 2 Customized Features P. 359 Driving • If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R . • If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the power system, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into (R . • If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of (R , Wide view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R . 1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera 551 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 552 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Refueling Fuel Information ■ Fuel recommendation Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage. ■ Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines. Driving Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system. For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. ■ Fuel tank capacity: 19.5 US gal (73.8 L) 552 1Fuel Information NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available. Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 553 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel How to Refuel Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler nozzle. 1. Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the Press rear. 2. Turn off the engine. 3. Press the fuel fill door release button. u The fuel fill door opens. 1How to Refuel 3 WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel. • Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. • Handle fuel only outdoors. • Wipe up spills immediately. Driving The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening. The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature. Continued 553 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 554 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel 4. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully. u Make sure that the end of the filler nozzle goes down along with the filler pipe. u Keep the filler nozzle level. u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically. u After filling, wait about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle. 5. Shut the fuel fill door by hand. Driving 554 1How to Refuel If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer. Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity. If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle. 2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container P. 638 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 555 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle. ■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the driver information interface. • Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended. 2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 570 Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving. Miles driven Gallons of fuel Miles per Gallon 100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/ Driving • Maintain the specified tire pressure. • Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. • Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight and increases wind resistance. 1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions 555 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 556 ページ 556 ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 557 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Maintenance This chapter discusses basic maintenance. Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 558 Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 559 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 560 Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 561 Maintenance Under the Hood Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 567 Opening the Hood ........................... 568 Engine Compartment Cover............. 569 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 570 Oil Check ......................................... 571 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 572 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 573 Engine Coolant ................................ 575 Transmission Fluid............................ 577 Brake Fluid....................................... 578 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 578 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 579 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades .......................................... 584 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 588 Tire and Loading Information Label .. 589 Tire Labeling .................................... 589 Wear Indicators ............................... 593 Tire Service Life................................ 593 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 594 Tire Rotation.................................... 595 Winter Tires ..................................... 596 Battery............................................... 597 Remote Transmitter Care................. 599 Climate Control System Maintenance .....600 Cleaning Interior Care .................................... 602 Exterior Care.................................... 604 Accessories and Modifications ........ 607 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) .. 591 557 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 558 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.) ■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance ■ Daily inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling. ■ Periodic inspections • Check the brake fluid level monthly. 2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 578 • Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 588 • Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. Maintenance 558 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 579 1Inspection and Maintenance U.S. models Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are “certified” to EPA standards. According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the driver information interface. 2 Maintenance Service Items P. 564 If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com. 2 Authorized Manuals P. 651 • Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. 2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 584 If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 559 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance Safety When Performing Maintenance Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task. ■ Maintenance Safety • To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts. • Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire. • To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline. • Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the 12-volt battery or compressed air. • Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation. ■ Vehicle Safety 3 WARNING Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner’s manual. 3 WARNING Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual. Maintenance • The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off. • Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts. • Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts. u Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated. 1Safety When Performing Maintenance 559 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 560 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles. Maintenance 560 1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 561 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Maintenance MinderTM If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services. Maintenance 561 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 562 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM To Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the driver information interface. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time. 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the ENTER button repeatedly until home screen appears. 3. Select Maintenance by pressing the 3 / 4 button repeatedly and press ENTER. 4. Select Oil Life by pressing the 3 / 4 button and press ENTER. 5. The engine oil life appears on the screen. Home Screen Maintenance 562 Models with Display Audio 3 Button ENTER Button 4 Button (Back) Button (Home) Button Models with color audio system 3 Button ENTER Button 4 Button (Hangup/Back) Button (Home) Button Engine Oil Life 1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage. Displayed Engine Oil Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) Life (%) 100 100 to 91 90 90 to 81 80 80 to 71 70 70 to 61 60 60 to 51 50 50 to 41 40 40 to 31 30 30 to 21 20 20 to 16 15 15 to 11 10 10 to 6 5 5 to 1 0 0 There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the driver information interface. 2 Maintenance Service Items P. 564 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 563 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Due Soon 15% The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent. Once you switch the display *1/ *2, or by pressing the button, this message will go off. The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced soon. Maintenance Due Now 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 *1/ *2, percent. Press the or button to switch to another display. The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible. Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance Maintenance The remaining engine oil life has The engine oil life has passed. passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be distance appears after driving over 10 inspected and serviced immediately. miles (U.S. models) or 10 km (Canadian models). Press the *1 *2 / , or button to switch to another display. *1:Models with color audio system *2:Models with Display Audio The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message. Continued 563 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 564 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Maintenance Service Items System Message Indicator 1Maintenance Service Items • Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy. Maintenance Minder Message Main Item Sub Items U.S. models CODE A B ● ● ● ● Maintenance ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil*1 Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA®) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system# Inspect fuel lines and connections# *1: If the message Maintenance Due Now does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. # : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 649. *2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures (under -20°F, -29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.) /100,000 km (Canada). 564 * Not available on all models CODE 1 2 ● ● ● ● 3 4 ● ● ● ● 5 6 7 ● ● ● Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element*2 Replace dust and pollen filter*3 Inspect drive belt Replace transmission fluid and transfer fluid * Replace spark plugs Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4 Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace rear differential fluid *, *5 Replace brake fluid*6 *5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (Shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *6: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 565 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM Canadian models 1Maintenance Service Items • Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy. CODE A 0 ● ● Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil*1 Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter *1: If the message Maintenance Due Now does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. *2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles). *4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 43ºC, 110ºF), in very low temperatures (under -29ºC, -20ºF), replace every 100,000 km (60,000 miles). *5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (Shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 12,000km (7,500 miles), then every 24,000 km (15,000 miles). *6: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years. # : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 649. CODE 1 2 ● ● ● ● 3 4 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Continued Maintenance 5 6 7 9 Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element*2 Replace dust and pollen filter*3 Inspect drive belt Replace transmission fluid and transfer fluid Replace spark plugs Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4 Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace rear differential fluid*5 Replace brake fluid*6 Service front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system# Inspect fuel lines and connections# 565 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 566 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Resetting the Display 1Resetting the Display Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service. NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems. The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself. Models with Display Audio 3 Button ENTER Button Maintenance 4 Button 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Display the engine oil life. 2 Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information P. 562 3. Press and hold the ENTER button for about 10 seconds to enter the reset mode. 4. Press the 3 / 4 button to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All Due Items (You can also select Cancel to end the process). 5. Press the ENTER button to reset the selected item. 6. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset. 566 You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen. 2 Customized Features P. 359 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 567 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Maintenance Under the Hood Maintenance Items Under the Hood Engine Oil Fill Cap Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange) Brake Fluid (Black Cap) Washer Fluid Battery Engine Coolant Reserve Tank Maintenance Radiator Cap 567 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 568 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood Opening the Hood 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake. 2. Pull the hood release handle under the driver's side lower corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly. Hood Release Handle Pull 1Opening the Hood NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers. When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched. 3. Pull up the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever. Lever If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated. Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated. Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts. Maintenance Support Rod Grip Clamp 568 4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood. When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 569 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Cover Engine Compartment Cover The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by a cover. You may need to remove the cover when you perform certain maintenance work. Pull up on the engine compartment cover, remove it from the pins. Engine Compartment Cover Maintenance 569 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 570 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil Recommended Engine Oil Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows. Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged. Genuine Engine Oil ● Honda Genuine Motor Oil Maintenance Ambient Temperature Commercial Engine Oil ● Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the container. Ambient Temperature *1:Formulated to improve fuel economy. ■ Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade. 570 1Recommended Engine Oil Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability. The following seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 571 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check Oil Check We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground. Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil. 1. Remove the dipstick (orange). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its hole. 1Oil Check If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill. 4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary. Maintenance Upper Mark Lower Mark 571 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 572 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil Adding Engine Oil 1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine oil dipstick. Engine Oil Fill Cap Maintenance 572 1Adding Engine Oil If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components. NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and engine damage. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 573 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly. Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver information interface. 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the Drain Bolt engine off. 2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap. 3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the Washer oil into a suitable container. 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground. Maintenance Continued 573 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 574 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter Oil Filter Maintenance 574 4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil. 5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it. 6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the oil filter base, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the oil filter rubber seal. 7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque: 29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m) 8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 5.7 US qt (5.4 L) 9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine. 10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter. 11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil. 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer. When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 575 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant Engine Coolant 1Engine Coolant Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water. We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly. 3 WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap. ■ Reserve Tank Reserve Tank MAX 1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool. 2. Remove the engine compartment cover. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 569 If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible. Maintenance MIN 3. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank. u If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. 4. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. NOTICE Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased.Consult a dealer for details. Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components. Continued 575 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 576 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant ■ Radiator Radiator Cap 1Radiator 1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool. 2. Remove the engine compartment cover. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 569 3. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system. Do not push the cap down when turning. 4. Push down and turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise to remove it. 5. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low. 6. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully. Maintenance 576 NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 577 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid Transmission Fluid ■ Automatic Transmission Fluid Specified fluid: Honda Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF-TYPE 3.1 or higher Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary. Do not attempt to check or change the automatic transmission fluid yourself. 1Automatic Transmission Fluid Do not mix Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 (or higher) with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATFTYPE 3.1 (or higher) may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 (or higher) is not covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty. Maintenance 577 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 578 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid Brake Fluid Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 NOTICE ■ Checking the Brake Fluid The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reserve tank. Brake Reservoir 1Brake Fluid MAX Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive damage. If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement. Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible. MIN If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible. Maintenance Refilling Window Washer Fluid Models without washer level sensor Open the cap and check the amount of window washer fluid. If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir. Models with washer level sensor If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the driver information interface. Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir. 578 1Refilling Window Washer Fluid NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid. Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale build up. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 579 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Replacing Light Bulbs Headlight Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. 1Headlight Bulbs High beam headlight: LED type 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type) * Low beam headlight: LED type * NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter. Models with halogen headlights ■ High Beam Headlights Clips Driver side 1. Remove the engine compartment cover. The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 569 2. Remove the clips. 3. Remove the air intake duct. Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Models with LED high beam headlights High beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Air Intake Duct * Not available on all models Continued Maintenance Models with halogen high beam headlights When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth. 579 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 580 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuDaytime Running Lights and Parking Lights Both sides Bulb Tab Coupler 4. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 5. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to remove. 6. Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise. 7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb. 1Headlight Bulbs Remove the clip using a Phillips-head screwdriver. Center pin Daytime Running Lights and Parking Lights Daytime running lights and parking lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Front Side Marker Lights Maintenance 580 Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push until it is flat. Push until the pin is flat. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 581 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal Light Bulbs Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. Front Turn Signal Light: 28/8W (Amber) 1. Remove the screws, pull the inner fender back. Screws Bulb 2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. 3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb. Socket Maintenance Fog Lights * Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. * Not available on all models 581 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 582 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights * Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights * Side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Brake/Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. Brake/Taillight: LED Rear Side Marker Light: LED Rear Turn Signal Light: 21W (Amber) 1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the bolts. 2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar. Bolts Maintenance 3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. Remove the old bulb. 4. Insert a new bulb and turn clockwise. 5. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on the body. 6. Align the pins with the body grommets, then push in until they fully seat. Bulb 582 Socket * Not available on all models 1Brake/Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs Brake/taillights and rear side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 583 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuBack-Up Lights Back-Up Lights When replacing, use the following bulbs. Back-Up Lights: 21 W Socket 1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. Remove the old bulb. 2. Insert a new bulb and turn clockwise. Bulb Rear License Plate Lights Rear license plate lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Maintenance High-Mount Brake Light 583 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 584 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades Checking Wiper Blades If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass. Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the passenger side. 1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield. Lock Tab Maintenance 584 2. Place a cloth on the edge of the lock tab. Push the lock tab up with a flat-tip screw driver. 3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 585 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber 4. Slide the wiper blade out of the holder by pulling the tabbed end out. Blade Blade 5. Remove the retainers from the wiper blade that has been removed, and mount to a new wiper blade. u Correctly align the wiper blade protrusion and the retainer grooves. Retainer Maintenance 6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end. u The tab on the holder should fit in the indent of the wiper blade. 7. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm, then push down the lock tab. 8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first, then the driver side. 585 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 586 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Raise the wiper arm off. 2. Pivot the bottom end of the wiper blade up until it comes off from the wiper arm. Wiper Blade Wiper Arm 3. Slide the blade out of the holder. Blade Maintenance 4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and mount it to a new rubber blade. Retainer Rubber 586 1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm, it may damage the rear window. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 587 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber 5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder. u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. Maintenance 587 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 588 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated. ■ Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating. Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly. Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge. Maintenance At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa, 0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month. ■ Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: • Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. • Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. • Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. • Excessive tread wear. 2 Wear Indicators P. 593 • Cracks or other damage around valve stem. 588 1Checking Tires 3 WARNING Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance. Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached. If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold. Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced. Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before long trips. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 589 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label Tire and Loading Information Label The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information. Label Example 1Tire and Loading Information Label The tire and loading information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and spare. Tire Labeling Example Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN) The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described as shown. Maximum Tire Pressure Tire Size ■ Tire Sizes Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. Continued Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. P235/60R18 102V P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). 235: Tire width in millimeters. 60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 18: Rim diameter in inches. 102: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating). Maintenance Maximum Tire Load 1Tire Sizes 589 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 590 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling ■ Tire Identification Number (TIN) The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire. ■ Glossary of Tire Terminology Maintenance 590 Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread. 1Tire Identification Number (TIN) DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture. Year Week 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 591 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings. ■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Continued For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Maintenance ■ Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. 1Uniform Tire Quality Grading 591 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 592 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) Maintenance 592 ■ Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 1Traction ■ Temperature The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 1Temperature Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 593 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators Wear Indicators Example of a Wear Indicator mark The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads. Tire Service Life The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use). Maintenance In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear. 593 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 594 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement Tire and Wheel Replacement Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire's sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system to work incorrectly. It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs. If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle. Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. Maintenance 594 1Tire and Wheel Replacement 3 WARNING Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 595 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation Tire Rotation Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life. ■ Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here. Front 1Tire Rotation Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below. Front Rotation Mark ■ Tires with rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here. Maintenance Front 595 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 596 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires Winter Tires If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving. Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding. 1Winter Tires 3 WARNING Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed. Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law. When mounting, refer to the following points. For winter tires: • Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. • Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: • Install them on the front tires only. • Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the chains listed below: Maintenance Models with 245/50R20 tires Cable-type: SCC Super Z LT ZT735 Models with 265/45R20 tires Cable-type: SCC Super Z6 SZ435 • Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can. • Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. • Drive slowly. 596 Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains. NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle. When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle operational limits. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 597 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Battery Checking the Battery The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. 1Battery 3 WARNING The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation. A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you. Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly. To access the battery terminals: 1. Remove the engine compartment cover. When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 569 2. Remove the clips using a Phillips-head screwdriver, then remove the air intake duct. 2 High Beam Headlights P. 579 2 Audio System Theft Protection P. 229 • The clock resets *. 2 Clock P. 130 When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion. Maintenance If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead: • The audio system is disabled. WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications. Consult a dealer for more information. * Not available on all models 597 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 598 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuBatteryuCharging the AGM Battery Charging the AGM Battery AGM labeled batteries like those installed in your vehicle require a compatible charger to be properly charged. Damage to the battery can result if the battery is charged improperly or with the wrong equipment. For more information on how to charge your vehicle’s AGM battery, consult a dealer. Maintenance 598 1Battery The battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a battery other than this specified type may shorten the battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the battery, make sure to select the specified type. Ask a dealer for more details. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 599 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Button Battery If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery. 1Replacing the Button Battery Battery type: CR2032 1. Remove the built-in key. Battery 2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the buttons. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent scratching the transmitter. 3. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity. 3 WARNING CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children. If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately. NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. Maintenance Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer. 599 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 600 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Climate Control System Maintenance Air Conditioning To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. 1Climate Control System Maintenance NOTICE Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842. Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed. The air conditioner label is found under the hood: 2 Safety Labels P. 74 2 Specifications P. 642 Canadian models : Caution : Flammable Refrigerant Maintenance 600 : Requires Registered Technician to Service : Air Conditioning System 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 601 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuClimate Control System MaintenanceuDust and Pollen Filter Dust and Pollen Filter The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter. We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust. 1Dust and Pollen Filter If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement. Maintenance 601 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 602 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Cleaning Interior Care Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue. ■ Cleaning Seat Belts Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth. Loop 1Interior Care Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them. Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer. Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline. Maintenance After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing. ■ Cleaning the Window Wipe using a glass cleaner. 1Cleaning the Window Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them. Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor *. 602 * Not available on all models 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 603 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCleaninguInterior Care ■ Floor Mats Unlock Lock 1Floor Mats The front and rear floor mats hook over floor anchors, which keep them from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats. ■ Maintaining Genuine Leather * 1Maintaining Genuine Leather * It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains. Maintenance To properly clean leather: 1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust. 2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90% water and 10% neutral soap. 3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth. 4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade. * Not available on all models If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions. 603 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 604 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCleaninguExterior Care Exterior Care Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it. ■ Washing the Vehicle Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: • If driving on roads with road salt. • If driving in coastal areas. • If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces. 1Washing the Vehicle Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction. ■ Using an Automated Car Wash Maintenance 604 • Fold in the door mirrors. • For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off. • Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash. If you use a conveyor type automatic car wash, keep the transmission in (N position. 2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 464 ■ Using High Pressure Cleaners • Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. • Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to enter the vehicle interior. • Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead, use low pressure water and a mild detergent. Air Intake Vents Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel system or engine. When using an automated car wash that pulls the vehicle through with a conveyor, make sure vehicle is in car wash mode. 2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 464 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 605 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCleaninguExterior Care ■ Applying Wax 1Applying Wax A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary. ■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water. NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately. 1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin. ■ Cleaning the Window Wipe using a glass cleaner. ■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels Continued Maintenance Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet. 605 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 606 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuCleaninguExterior Care ■ Fogged Exterior Light Lenses The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights. Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction. However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Maintenance 606 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 607 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Accessories and Modifications Accessories When installing accessories, check the following: • Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and delay your reaction to driving conditions. • Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy. • Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle. 2 Fuses P. 631 • Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation. 1Accessories and Modifications 3 WARNING Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and modifications. Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle. Maintenance 607 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 608 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications Modifications Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect. Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations. The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle's electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems. Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components. Maintenance 608 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 609 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Handling the Unexpected This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles. Tools Types of Tools .................................. 610 If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 611 Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine ........................ 619 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak..........................................620 Emergency Engine Stop ................... 621 Jump Starting.................................... 622 Overheating How to Handle Overheating............. 625 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears......627 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ................................................. 627 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ................................... 628 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On ................................................. 629 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On ....................... 629 If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks........................ 630 If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message ............ 630 Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 631 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 635 Emergency Towing........................... 636 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door................................................. 637 Refueling Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container ...................................638 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate..639 609 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 610 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Tools Types of Tools 1Types of Tools The tools are stored in the cargo area. Wheel Nut Wrench/Jack Handle Jack Handle Bar Handling the Unexpected Spare Tire Cargo Bin Jack Tool Case Tool Case Funnel Cargo Bin Storage Bag 610 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 611 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced. 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Change the gear position to (P . 3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). 1Changing a Flat Tire Follow compact spare precautions: Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2) When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible. Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire. Handling the Unexpected The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle. Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire, as it can damage the tire pressure sensor. Continued 611 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 612 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire 1. Push the rear edge of the handle on the cargo floor lid and open the lid. Handle Handling the Unexpected 2. Lift the secondary lid, then remove the hook from the bottom of the lid. Hook 3. Attach the hook onto the weather seal lip. Seal Lip 612 1Changing a Flat Tire NOTICE Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 613 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire Locks Jack Handle Bar Jack 6. Pull out the wheel nut wrench, jack handle bar, storage bag, and jack from the tool case. Handling the Unexpected 5. Unscrew the spare tire bolt and slide the tire to the rear of the vehicle. Remove the spare tire from vehicle. Spare Tire Bolt Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle 4. Unlock the cargo bin by turning the two locks. Remove the cargo bin from the vehicle. Storage Bag Continued 613 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 614 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire 7. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire. The tire to be replaced. Handling the Unexpected 614 Wheel Blocks 8. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced. 9. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 615 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ How to Set Up the Jack 1How to Set Up the Jack 1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed. 3 WARNING The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath. Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. Jacking Points 3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground. Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle. Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or may not fit the jacking point. The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely: • Do not use while the engine is running. • Use only where the ground is firm and level. • Use only at the jacking points. • Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. • Do not put anything on top of or underneath the jack. Handling the Unexpected 2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch. Jack Handle Bar Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle Continued 615 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 616 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ Replacing the Flat Tire 1Replacing the Flat Tire 1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire. Handling the Unexpected 2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth. 3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating. 5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 94 lbf∙ft (127 N∙m, 13 kgf∙m) 616 Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 617 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ Storing the Flat Tire 1Storing the Flat Tire 1. Put the flat tyre in the storage bag provided with your vehicle. u The storage bag is in the tool case. 2. Knot the top of the storage bag. 3. Securely put the jack, jack handle bar and wheel nut wrench back in the tool case. Belt Rear Anchor Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants. Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving. Handling the Unexpected 4. Bore through the bag, and pass the holding belt through the hole of the bag and the wheel of the flat tire as shown. 3 WARNING 5. Place the flat tire in the cargo area, and thread the belt through the rear anchor as shown. 6. Pass the belt through the ring, and tighten the belt to secure the flat tire in place. Continued 617 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 618 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ TPMS with Tire Fill Assist and the Spare Tire If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressure Monitor Problem appears on the driver information interface, but this is normal. If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the warning message on the driver information interface and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers). Handling the Unexpected 618 1TPMS with Tire Fill Assist and the Spare Tire The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure that it is correct. Use the TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 619 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine If the engine does not start, check the starter. 1Checking the Engine If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it. 2 Jump Starting P. 622 Checklist Check for a message on the driver information interface. ● If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 620 uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range. 2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 165 Check the brightness of the interior lights. Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness. ● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all 2 Battery P. 597 If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 631 Review the engine start procedure. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 452 Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started. ● The starter turns over normally but the engine doesn’t start. There may be a problem with a fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly. Handling the Unexpected Starter condition Starter doesn’t turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly. 2 Immobilizer System P. 158 Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 104 Check the fuses. Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 635 If the problem continues: 2 Emergency Towing P. 636 619 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 620 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak Handling the Unexpected 620 If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the driver information interface, the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows: 1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the smart entry remote while the ENGINE START/ STOP button is flashing. The buttons on the smart entry remote should be facing you. u The ENGINE START/STOP button flashes for about 30 seconds. 2. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds and the ENGINE START/STOP button changes from flashing to on. u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode will change to ACCESSORY. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 621 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop Emergency Engine Stop The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations: • Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds. • Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times. U.S. models The gear position automatically changes to (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Then, the power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF. Canadian models The gear position automatically changes to (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal to change the mode VEHICLE OFF. Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be turned off. If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving, the beeper sounds. Handling the Unexpected The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place. 1Emergency Engine Stop 621 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 622 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Jump Starting ■ Jump Starting Procedure 1Jump Starting Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood. 1. Pull up on the engine compartment cover, Engine Compartment Cover remove it from the pins. 3 WARNING A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby. Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery. Handling the Unexpected Pin 2. Remove the holding clips and the air intake duct. Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting. Clip Air Intake Duct 622 Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 623 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuJump Startingu Pin Engine Cover 5. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. u When using an automotive battery charger to boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower charging voltage than 15 volts. Check the charger manual for the proper setting. 6. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal. 7. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the engine hanger as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part. 8. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine and increase its rpm slightly. 9. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact. Continued Handling the Unexpected Booster Battery 3. Pull up on the engine cover, remove it from the pins. u Start on the passenger side and lift the outermost edge of the cover. u Move towards the driver side while applying uniform upward pressure. 4. Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle’s battery + terminal. 623 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 624 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuJump Startingu ■ What to Do After the Engine Starts Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order: 1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery + terminal. Handling the Unexpected 624 Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 625 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Overheating How to Handle Overheating Overheating symptoms are as follows: • The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses power. • Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears on the driver information interface. • Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment. 1How to Handle Overheating 3 WARNING Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. ■ First thing to do NOTICE Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge needle at the H mark may damage the engine. Continuing to drive with the Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message on the driver information interface may damage the engine. Continued Handling the Unexpected 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides. Then, open the hood. 625 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 626 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating ■ Next thing to do MIN MAX Reserve Tank 1How to Handle Overheating Handling the Unexpected 1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the temperature gauge needle comes down. u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately stop the engine. 2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, remove the engine compartment cover then add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 569 u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on. ■ Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge. If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down, contact a dealer for repairs. 626 3 WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap. If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs. Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 627 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears ■ Reasons for the warning to appear Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. ■ What to do as soon as the warning appears 1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on. ■ What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for approximately three minutes. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary. 1If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. 2 Oil Check P. 571 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs. 1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery. Handling the Unexpected 3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure warning. u The warning disappears: Start driving again. u The warning does not disappear within 10 seconds: Immediately stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs. 627 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 628 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks Handling the Unexpected 628 ■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink • Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control system. • Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. ■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. ■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools. 1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged. If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 629 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On U.S. Canada ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on • The brake fluid is low. • There is a malfunction in the brake system. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. • If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. • If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking. ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on • Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system. • If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears. If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately. Handling the Unexpected If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On 1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On 629 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 630 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink Handling the Unexpected A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS with Tire Fill Assist or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb. ■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers). If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message ■ Reasons for the indicator to blink The transmission is malfunctioning. ■ What to do when the indicator blinks • Immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. • Change the gear position to (N after starting the engine. u Check if the (N position in the instrument panel and the indicator on the (N button light/blink. u The engine cannot be turned on unless the parking brake is set. 2 Starting the Engine P. 452 630 1If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level. TPMS with Tire Fill Assist provides visual and audible assistance during tire pressure adjustment. With the power mode in ON, while you adjust tire pressure up or down, the system alerts you as follows: Below recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and exterior lights flash once every five seconds. At recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and exterior lights flash rapidly for ~ five seconds. Above recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and lights flash twice every three seconds. 1If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message You may not be able to start the engine. Make sure to set the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. 2 Emergency Towing P. 636 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 631 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Fuses Fuse Locations If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown. ■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type A ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating 1 2 Tab 3 4 5 6 7 * Not available on all models Amps (70 A) 30 A 40 A 20 A 30 A 150 A 30 A 30 A 20 A (20 A) 30 A 40 A (30 A) (30 A) 40 A (30 A) (20 A) − − − − 10 A (7.5 A) 10 A 10 A 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Circuit Protected L H/L LO − R H/L LO IGPS INJECTOR H/L LO MAIN FI-ECU BACKUP FR FOG * HAZARD PASSENGER P/ SEAT(RECLINE) * PASSENGER P/SEAT(SLIDE) * − MG CLUTCH MAIN RLY FI SUB IG COIL DBW SMALL/STOP MAIN BACK UP HTD STRG WHEEL * HORN RADIO/USB Amps 10 A − 10 A 7.5 A 20 A 20 A 10 A (10 A) 15 A (20 A) (20 A) − 7.5 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 20 A 10 A (15 A) 10 A 15 A Continued Handling the Unexpected Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number. Located near the passenger's side damper house. Push the tabs to open the box. Circuit Protected − RR BLOWER ABS/VSA MTR ABS/VSA FSR MAIN FAN MAIN FUSE SUB FAN WIP MTR WASHER PREMIUM AMP * ENGINE MOUNT FR BLOWER A/C INVERTER * STANDARD AMP * RR DEF − PREMIUM AMP * − − − − PARKING LIGHT CRUISE CANCEL SW STOP LIGHT FI SUB VSS 631 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 632 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuFusesuFuse Locations ■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type B Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number. Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box. Handling the Unexpected Tab ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 632 * Not available on all models Circuit Protected − 4WD * IG MAIN IG MAIN2 P/TAILGATE MOTOR * F/B MAIN2 F/B MAIN EPS TRAILER MAIN TRAILER E-BRAKE BATTERY SENSOR H/L HI MAIN P/TAILGATE CLOSER * CTR ACC SOCKET RR ACC SOCKET * FR WIPER DEICER * ACC/IG2_MAIN TRAILER CHARGE IDLE STOP ST CUT IDLE STOP IDLE STOP ELECTRONIC GEAR SELECTOR RR HEATED SEAT * ST CUT FEED BACK Amps (40 A) (20 A) 30 A 30 A (40 A) 60 A 60 A 60 A (30 A) (20 A) 7.5 A 20 A (20 A) 20 A (20 A) (15 A) 10 A (20 A) 30 A 30 A 30 A 15 A (20 A) 7.5 A 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 633 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuFusesuFuse Locations ■ Interior Fuse Box Type A Located under the dashboard. Fuse Box Fuse locations are shown on the label on the outer side of the side panel cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number. * Not available on all models 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Circuit Protected DRIVER P/WINDOW DOOR LOCK SMART PASSENGER P/WINDOW FR ACC SOCKET FUEL PUMP ACG FR WIPER IG1 SMART SRS REAR L P/WINDOW − REAR R P/WINDOW FUEL LID DR P/SEAT(RECLINE) * − FR SEAT HEATER * INTR LT REAR L DOOR UNLOCK R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK DRL KEY LOCK A/C IG1a FEED BACK INST PANEL LIGHTS Amps 20 A 20 A 7.5 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 15 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A 20 A − 20 A 20 A (20 A) − (20 A) 7.5 A 10 A 10 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Circuit Protected LUMBAR SUPPORT * PARKING LIGHTS OPTION BACK LT REAR WIPER ST MOTOR SRS PASSENGER DOOR LOCK DRIVER DOOR LOCK DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER P/SEAT(SLIDE) * R H/L HI L H/L HI IG1b FEED BACK ACC REAR L DOOR LOCK − Amps (10 A) 7.5 A 10 A 7.5 A 10 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A 10 A 10 A (20 A) 10 A 10 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A − Continued Handling the Unexpected Fuse Label ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating 633 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 634 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuFusesuFuse Locations ■ Interior Fuse Box Type B Located under the dashboard. Fuse Box Handling the Unexpected 634 Fuse Label Fuse locations are shown on the image. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number. ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating A B C D E F G Circuit Protected METER ABS/VSA ACG MICU AUDIO BACK UP ACC Amps 10 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 15 A 10 A 7.5 A 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 635 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses Inspecting and Changing Fuses Blown Fuse Combined Fuse 1Inspecting and Changing Fuses NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system. Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on P. 631 to P. 634. There is a fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse box. Handling the Unexpected Fuse Puller 1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Turn headlights and all accessories off. 2. Remove the fuse box cover. 3. Check the large fuse in the engine compartment. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one. 4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one. 635 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 636 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Emergency Towing Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. All models ■ Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle. 2WD models ■ Wheel lift equipment Handling the Unexpected 636 The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle. 1Emergency Towing NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle’s weight. Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission. Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 637 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door ■ What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure: 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Wrap a cloth around the built-in key. Put it Cover into the cover slot as shown in the image, and remove the cover. 3. Pull the release lever toward you. u The release lever unlocks the fuel fill door when it is pulled. After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked. Handling the Unexpected Release Lever 1What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door 637 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 638 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Refueling Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle. 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Press the fuel fill door release button. u The fuel fill door opens. 3. Take the funnel out of the cargo bin in the cargo area. Funnel 2 Types of Tools P. 610 Cargo Floor Lid Handling the Unexpected 4. Place the end of the funnel on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully. u Make sure that the end of the funnel goes down along with the filler pipe. Funnel 5. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel container. u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any. 6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck. u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before storing it. 7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand. 638 1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container 3 WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel. • Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. • Handle fuel only outdoors. • Wipe up spills immediately. NOTICE Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system. Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel system and its seal. Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel. 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 639 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate ■ What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure: 1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the Cover cover on the inside of the tailgate. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches. 2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while pushing the lever to the right using a flat-tip screw driver. Following up: After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked. When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure there is enough space around the tailgate, and it does not hit anyone or any object. Handling the Unexpected Models with power tailgate Screwdriver 1What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate Lever Models without power tailgate Screwdriver Lever 639 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 640 ページ 640 ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 641 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Information This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation. Specifications .................................... 642 Identification Numbers Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number ......................................... 644 Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 645 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 646 Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 647 Warranty Coverages ........................ 649 Authorized Manuals......................... 651 Customer Service Information......... 652 641 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 642 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Specifications ■ Vehicle Specifications ■ Air Conditioning ■ Light Bulbs Model Passport No. of Passengers: Front Rear Total Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front) Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear) Gross Combined Weight U.S.: Rating Canada: Refrigerant Type Charge Quantity Lubricant Type Quantity Headlights (Low Beam) 2 3 5 See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb 8,025 lbs (3,640 kg)*1 9,755 lbs (4,425 kg)*2 4,425 kg *1: 2WD models *2: AWD models HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) 21.3 – 23.1 oz (605 – 655 g) RL85HM (POE) 7.75 – 9.33 cu-in (127 – 153 cm3) ■ Engine Specifications Displacement Spark Plugs 211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm3) NGK DILZKR7B11G ■ Fuel Type Fuel Tank Capacity Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher 19.5 US gal (73.8 L) ■ Washer Fluid Tank Capacity U.S.: 4 US qt (3.8 L) Canada: 5.6 US qt (5.3 L) Headlights (High Beam) Information Fog Lights * Front Turn Signal Lights Front Side Marker Lights Parking/Daytime Running Lights Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors) * Brake/Taillights/Rear Side Marker Lights Back-Up Lights Rear Turn Signal Lights High-Mount Brake Light Rear License Plate Lights Interior Lights Front Map Lights Rear Map Lights Ambient Lights Vanity Mirror Lights * Door Courtesy Lights * Door Inner Handle Lights * Door Pocket Lights * Beverage Holder Light * Foot Lights * Console Compartment Light Glove Box Light Cargo Area Lights *1: Models without navigation system *2: Models with navigation system 642 * Not available on all models LED 60 W (HB3)*1 LED*2 LED 28/8 W (Amber) LED LED LED LED 21 W 21 W (Amber) LED LED 5W 5W LED 1.4 W 3.8 W LED LED LED LED 1.4 W 1.4 W 8W 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 643 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuSpecificationsu ■ Brake Fluid Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 ■ Engine Oil Recommended ■ Automatic Transmission Fluid Specified Capacity Honda ATF Type-3.1 Change 3.5 US qt (3.3 L) ■ Rear Differential Fluid * Specified Capacity Honda DPSF-II Change 1.92 US qt (1.82 L) ■ Transfer Assembly Fluid * Specified Capacity Honda HGO-1 Change 0.45 US qt (0.43 L) Capacity ■ Tire ·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20 ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil Change 5.4 US qt (5.1 L) Change including 5.7 US qt (5.4 L) filter ■ Engine Coolant Specified Ratio Capacity Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 50/50 with distilled water 1.96 US gal (7.40 L) (change including the remaining 0.22 US gal (0.82 L) in the reserve tank) Size*1 Regular Compact Spare Wheel Size Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) Size Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) Regular Compact Spare 245/50R20 102H 265/45R20 104H 35 (240 [2.4])*2 37 (255 [2.6])*3 T165/80D17 104M 60 (420 [4.2]) 20 x 8J*2 20 x 8 1/2J*3 17 x 4T *1: Original tire size is mentioned on the tire information label on the driver’s doorjamb. *2: Models with 245/50R20 *3: Models with 265/45R20 Information * Not available on all models 643 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 644 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Identification Numbers Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows: 1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover. Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number Cover Automatic Transmission Number Information 644 Certification Label/Vehicle Identification Number 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 645 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Devices that Emit Radio Waves Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below: As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Information This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 645 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 646 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Reporting Safety Defects In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada. Information If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety. 646 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 647 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some States use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected. To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. 1Testing of Readiness Codes The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions. If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer. If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following: Continued Information 1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes. 6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds. 647 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 648 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes 7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds). 8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. 9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes. Information 648 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 649 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Warranty Coverages ■ U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship. Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information. Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage. Information Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details. Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship. Continued 649 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 650 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 uuWarranty Coveragesu Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer. Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle. Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet. ■ Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle. ■ EPA Contact Information An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting: Information 650 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Transportation and Air Quality Compliance Division, Light-Duty Vehicle Group Attn: Warranty Complaints 2000 Traverwood Drive Ann Arbor, MI 48105 Email: [email protected] 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 651 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Authorized Manuals ■ Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options. ■ For U.S. Owners Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com. ■ For Canadian Owners Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require. Information 651 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 652 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Customer Service Information Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services. U.S. Owners American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009 Information 652 In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546 Canadian Owners Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: [email protected] 1Customer Service Information When you call or write, please give us the following information: • Vehicle Identification Number 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number P. 644 • Date of purchase • Odometer reading of your vehicle • Your name, address, and telephone number • A detailed description of the problem • Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 653 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Index Index A Display Setup .................................. 239, 278 Error Messages........................................ 327 File Manager ........................................... 271 General Information ................................ 330 HD Subchannel ....................................... 286 Home Screen........................................... 257 HondaLink® ........................................... 312 How to Delete a File ................................ 274 How to Transfer a File ............................. 271 How to Update Wirelessly ....................... 265 How to Update with a USB Device........... 269 iPod ................................................ 242, 297 Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 279 MP3/WMA/AAC...................... 245, 300, 303 My Honda Music ..................................... 303 Playing AM/FM Radio .............................. 283 Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 248, 307 Playing SiriusXM® Radio .......................... 287 Playing Social Playlist ............................... 310 Reactivating ............................................ 229 Remote Controls ..................................... 230 Security Code.......................................... 229 Selecting an Audio Source....................... 279 Siri Eyes Free ........................................... 319 Status Area ............................................. 262 System Updates....................................... 265 Theft Protection ...................................... 229 Updating Apps ........................................ 263 USB Flash Drives ...................... 245, 300, 331 USB Port.................................................. 227 Wallpaper Setup.............................. 236, 255 Index AAC........................................... 245, 300, 303 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 537 AC Power Outlet ...................................... 206 Accessories and Modifications ................ 607 Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 205 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)................ 505 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber)..................................................... 88 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Green)...................................................... 88 Additives Coolant .................................................. 575 Engine Oil ............................................... 570 Washer ................................................... 578 Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 570 Adjusting Armrest .................................................. 197 Front Seats.............................................. 188 Head Restraints............................... 194, 195 Mirrors.................................................... 186 Rear Seats............................................... 192 Steering Wheel ....................................... 185 Agile Handling Assist............................... 479 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System) ....................... 217 Changing the Mode................................ 217 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows .............................................. 218 Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 601 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 218 Sensor ..................................................... 223 Synchronization Mode ............................. 220 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 217 Air Pressure ....................................... 589, 643 Airbags ........................................................ 45 Advanced Airbags ..................................... 51 After a Collision......................................... 49 Airbag Care ............................................... 57 Event Data Recorder .................................... 0 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 48 Indicator .............................................. 55, 80 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 56 Sensors...................................................... 45 Side Airbags .............................................. 52 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 54 All-wheel drive (AWD) Indicator ............... 85 AM/FM Radio .................................... 240, 283 Android Auto............................................ 323 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 537 Indicator .................................................... 79 Apple CarPlay ........................................... 320 Armrest ..................................................... 197 Audio Remote Controls............................ 230 Audio System ............................ 226, 233, 251 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 238, 277 AM/FM Radio .................................. 240, 283 Android Auto .......................................... 323 Apple CarPlay .......................................... 320 Audio/Information Screen ................ 234, 252 Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 228 Changing the Screen Brightness .............. 278 653 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 654 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Wi-Fi Connection..................................... 317 Audio/Information Screen................ 234, 252 Authorized Manuals................................. 651 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 147 Customize ....................................... 125, 373 Auto High-Beam ....................................... 174 Indicator .................................................... 80 Auto Idle Stop........................................... 468 OFF Button .............................................. 469 Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Amber) .............. 85 Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green) ............... 85 Automatic Intermittent Wipers ............... 178 Automatic Lighting .................................. 170 Automatic Transmission ........................... 459 Creeping ................................................. 459 Fluid ........................................................ 577 Kickdown ................................................ 459 Operating the Shift Button....................... 462 Shifting.................................................... 460 Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 228 Average Fuel Economy............................. 110 B Index 654 Back-Up Light............................................ 583 Battery....................................................... 597 Charging System Indicator ................. 77, 627 Jump Starting .......................................... 622 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ........ 597 Belts (Seat) .................................................. 37 Beverage Holders...................................... 203 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Blind Spot Information System................ 480 Bluetooth® Audio ............................. 248, 307 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ........... 381, 406 Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 72 Brake System ............................................ 535 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................... 537 Brake Assist System ................................. 538 Fluid........................................................ 578 Foot Brake............................................... 536 Indicator............................................ 76, 629 Parking Brake .......................................... 535 Brake System (Red) Indicator.................................................. 629 Brightness Control (Instrument Panel).... 182 Bulb Replacement .................................... 579 Back-Up Lights ........................................ 583 Brake lights ............................................. 582 Daytime Running Lights........................... 580 Fog Lights ............................................... 581 Front Side Marker Lights.......................... 580 Front Turn Signal Lights........................... 581 Headlights............................................... 579 High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 583 Parking Lights.......................................... 580 Rear License Plate Lights.......................... 583 Rear Side Marker Lights........................... 582 Rear Turn Signal Lights ............................ 582 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights .................................................... 582 Taillights.................................................. 582 Bulb Specifications ................................... 642 C Car Wash Mode........................................ 464 Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 73 Carrying Cargo ................................. 435, 437 Certification Label ................................... 644 Changing Bulbs ........................................ 579 Charging System Indicator ................ 77, 627 Child Safety ................................................ 58 Childproof Door Locks ............................ 146 Child Seat ................................................... 58 Booster Seats ............................................ 72 Child Seat for Infants ................................ 60 Child Seat for Small Children .................... 61 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ................................................. 66 Larger Children ......................................... 71 Rear-facing Child Seat............................... 60 Selecting a Child Seat ............................... 62 Childproof Door Locks............................. 146 Cleaning the Exterior............................... 604 Cleaning the Interior ............................... 602 Climate Control System ........................... 217 Changing the Mode................................ 217 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows .............................................. 218 Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 601 Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 218 Sensors ................................................... 223 Synchronization Mode ............................ 220 Using Automatic Climate Control............ 217 Clock ......................................................... 130 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 655 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Coat Hook ................................................ 209 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ................................................. 493 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator ............................. 88, 89 Compact Spare Tire.......................... 611, 643 Console Compartment............................. 201 Controls .................................................... 129 Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 575 Adding to the Radiator ........................... 576 Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 575 Overheating............................................ 625 Temperature Gauge................................ 104 Creeping (Automatic Transmission)........ 459 Cross Traffic Monitor ............................... 546 Cup Holders.............................................. 203 Customer Service Information ................ 652 Customized Features ............... 119, 352, 359 D 午後３時２９分 Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 571 Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 168 Door Mirrors ............................................. 187 Doors ......................................................... 133 Auto Door Locking .................................. 147 Auto Door Unlocking............................... 147 Door Open Message .................................. 36 Keys ........................................................ 133 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside..................................................... 144 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside.................................................. 136 Lockout Prevention System ...................... 143 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 591 Driver Information Interface ................... 105 Accessing Content................................... 107 Warning and Information Messages .......... 91 Driving....................................................... 433 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 505 Automatic Transmission........................... 459 Braking.................................................... 535 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............... 450 Shifting Gear ........................................... 460 Starting the Engine .................................. 452 Driving Position Memory System............. 183 Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 601 E Eco Assist® System ...................................... 10 ECON Button............................................. 474 Econ Mode Indicator.................................................... 84 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator............................................ 81, 629 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 477 Emergency ................................................ 636 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 647 Engine Coolant................................................... 575 Jump Starting.......................................... 622 Number................................................... 644 Oil........................................................... 570 Remote Engine Start................................ 454 Starting ................................................... 452 Engine Compartment Cover .................... 569 Engine Coolant......................................... 575 Adding to the Radiator............................ 576 Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 575 Overheating ............................................ 625 Temperature Gauge ................................ 104 Engine Oil ................................................. 570 Adding.................................................... 572 Checking................................................. 571 Displaying Maintenance Minder Information ........................................... 562 Low Oil Pressure Symbol.......................... 627 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 570 ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 165 EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ...... 629 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 73 Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 604 Index Daytime Running Lights .......................... 173 Dead Battery ............................................ 622 Defaulting All the Settings...................... 377 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows................................................. 218 Detachable Anchor .................................... 42 Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 645 Dimming Headlights .............................................. 169 Rearview Mirror ...................................... 186 木曜日 655 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 656 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Exterior Mirrors......................................... 187 F Index 656 Features..................................................... 225 File Manager ............................................. 271 Filters Dust and Pollen ....................................... 601 Oil ........................................................... 573 Flat Tire ..................................................... 611 Floor Mats ................................................. 603 Fluids Automatic Transmission........................... 577 Brake....................................................... 578 Engine Coolant........................................ 575 Windshield Washer.................................. 578 FM/AM Radio .................................... 240, 283 Fog Light Indicator ..................................... 83 Fog Lights.................................................. 172 Folding Down the Rear Seat .................... 193 Foot Brake................................................. 536 Front Airbags (SRS) ..................................... 48 Front Seats ................................................ 188 Adjusting................................................. 188 Front Sensor Camera ................................ 532 Fuel ...................................................... 23, 552 Economy ................................................. 555 Gauge ..................................................... 104 Instant Fuel Economy............................... 110 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 79 Range...................................................... 110 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Recommendation .................................... 552 Refueling................................................. 552 Fuel Economy ........................................... 555 Fuel Fill Cap .............................................. 554 Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 23, 553 Unable to Unlock .................................... 637 Fuses.......................................................... 631 Inspecting and Changing......................... 635 Locations......................... 631, 632, 633, 634 G Gasoline (Fuel) Economy ................................................. 555 Gauge..................................................... 104 Information ............................................. 552 Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 110 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 79 Refueling................................................. 552 Gauges ...................................................... 104 Gear Position Indicator ...................... 77, 462 Gear Shift Positions Automatic Transmission .......................... 460 Glass (care)................................................ 605 Glove Box.................................................. 201 H Handling the Unexpected ....................... 609 HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ...................... 381, 406 Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History............................. 395, 415 Automatic Transferring ........................... 414 Caller’s ID Information ............................ 393 Displaying Messages ............................... 425 Favorite Contacts .................................... 416 HFL Buttons .................................... 381, 406 HFL Menus...................................... 383, 409 HFL Status Display ........................... 382, 408 In Case of Emergency ............................. 429 Limitations for Manual Operation.... 382, 408 Making a Call ................................. 400, 418 Options During a Call...................... 405, 421 Phone Setup ................................... 387, 411 Receiving a Call............................... 404, 421 Receiving a Text Message........................ 423 Ring Tone ....................................... 393, 414 Selecting a Phone ................................... 424 Speed Dial .............................................. 396 To Clear the System ................................ 394 To Set Up a Text Message Options .......... 422 Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4 HD RadioTM ............................................... 286 Head Restraints ................................ 194, 195 Headlights ................................................ 169 Auto High-Beam ..................................... 174 Automatic Operation .............................. 170 Dimming......................................... 169, 173 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 657 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Operating ............................................... 169 Heated Steering Wheel ........................... 214 Heated Windshield Button...................... 181 Heater (Steering Wheel).......................... 214 Heaters (Seat)........................... 211, 212, 213 HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ...................... 381, 406 High Beam Indicator.................................. 82 Hill Start Assist System............................. 457 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ........... 378 Honda App License Agreement .............. 332 Honda Sensing® ........................................ 24 HondaLink® ............................................ 312 I 午後３時２９分 Brake System (Red) .................................. 629 Charging System ............................... 77, 627 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ........................................... 88, 89 Econ Mode ................................................ 84 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System .. 81, 629 Fog Light ................................................... 83 Gear Position ............................................. 77 Hazard Warning ........................................ 82 High Beam ................................................ 82 Immobilizer System.................................... 83 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .......... 520 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Amber) ................................................... 86 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Green) .................................................... 86 Lights On................................................... 82 Low Fuel.................................................... 79 Low Oil Pressure Symbol .......................... 627 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ..................... 82, 630 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 77, 628 Parking Brake and Brake System .............. 629 Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber)... 76 Parking Brake and Brake System (Red) ....... 76 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).............. 87 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 38, 79 Security System Alarm ............................... 83 Supplemental Restraint System ............ 55, 80 System Message ........................................ 84 Turn Signal ................................................ 82 Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF .... 81, 478 Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) System ............................................ 80, 477 Information .............................................. 641 Instant Fuel Economy............................... 110 Instrument Panel ........................................ 75 Brightness Control................................... 182 Integrated Sunshades .............................. 210 Intelligent Traction Management System ..................................................... 475 Intelligent VTM4 (i-VTM4TM).................... 485 Interior Lights ........................................... 198 Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 186 iPad ........................................................... 331 iPhone ....................................................... 331 iPod ........................................... 242, 297, 331 J Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 615 Jump Starting ........................................... 622 K Key Number Tag....................................... Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... Keys ........................................................... Lockout Prevention.................................. Number Tag ............................................ Rear Door Won’t Open............................ Remote Transmitter................................. Types and Functions ................................ 134 143 133 143 134 146 141 133 Index Identification Numbers............................ 644 Engine and Transmission......................... 644 Vehicle Identification............................... 644 Illumination Control ................................ 182 Button .................................................... 182 Immobilizer System.................................. 158 Indicator ................................................... 83 Indicators.................................................... 76 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Amber) .... 88 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Green) ..... 88 All-wheel drive (AWD)............................... 85 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 79 Auto High-Beam ....................................... 80 Auto Idle Stop (Amber) ............................. 85 Auto Idle Stop (Green) .............................. 85 Blind spot information ...................... 90, 481 木曜日 657 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 658 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) ....... 459 L Index 658 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ......... 518 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber) ..................................... 86 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Green)....................................... 86 LaneWatchTM ............................................. 483 LATCH (Child Seats) .............................. 63, 69 Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/ Android Auto .......................................... 344 License Information.................................. 347 Lights ................................................. 169, 579 Auto High-Beam...................................... 174 Automatic ............................................... 170 Bulb Replacement.................................... 579 Daytime Running Lights ........................... 173 High Beam Indicator .................................. 82 Interior .................................................... 198 Light Switches ......................................... 169 Lights On Indicator .................................... 82 Turn Signals............................................. 168 Load Limits ................................................ 437 Locking/Unlocking .................................... 133 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 147 Childproof Door Locks ............................. 146 From Inside.............................................. 144 From Outside........................................... 136 Keys ........................................................ 133 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Using a Key ............................................. 142 Lockout Prevention System ..................... 143 Low Battery Charge ................................. 627 Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 79 Low Oil Pressure Symbol.......................... 627 Lower Anchors...................................... 63, 69 Lubricant Specifications Chart................. 643 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 437 Lumbar Support ....................................... 189 Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch....... 189 M Maintenance..................................... 112, 557 Battery .................................................... 597 Brake Fluid .............................................. 578 Cleaning ................................................. 602 Coolant................................................... 575 Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 561 Oil........................................................... 571 Precautions ............................................. 558 Radiator .................................................. 576 Remote Transmitter................................. 599 Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 579 Safety...................................................... 559 Service Items ........................................... 564 Tires ........................................................ 588 Transmission Fluid ................................... 577 Under the Hood ...................................... 567 Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 77, 628 Map Lights ................................................ 199 Maximum Load Limit............................... 437 Meters, Gauges ........................................ 104 Mirrors ...................................................... 186 Adjusting ................................................ 186 Door ....................................................... 187 Exterior ................................................... 187 Interior Rearview ..................................... 186 Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 607 Moonroof ................................................. 164 MP3........................................... 245, 300, 303 MP3/WMA/AAC........................ 245, 300, 303 Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 550 My Honda Music ...................................... 303 N Navigation................................................ 111 Now Playing ............................................. 114 Numbers (Identification) ......................... 644 O Odometer ................................................. Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............. Oil (Engine) .............................................. Adding ................................................... Checking ................................................ Displaying Maintenance Minder Information........................................... Low Oil Pressure Symbol ......................... Oil Life .................................................... 106 450 570 572 571 562 627 112 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 659 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... Viscosity.................................................. Open Source Licenses .............................. Opening/Closing Hood ...................................................... Moonroof ............................................... Power Windows...................................... Tailgate................................................... Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel....................................... Outside Temperature Display ................. Overheating ............................................. 570 570 346 568 164 161 148 165 106 625 P 午後３時２９分 Power Windows........................................ 161 Precautions While Driving ....................... 458 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle .................................................. 458 Rain......................................................... 458 Pregnant Women ....................................... 43 Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 611 R Radiator .................................................... 576 Radio (FM/AM).................................. 240, 283 Radio (SiriusXM®) ..................................... 287 Radio Data System (RDS).................. 241, 285 Range ........................................................ 110 RDS (Radio Data System).................. 241, 285 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 647 Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel ................................ 222 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button ..................................................... 180 Rear Outer Seats Heaters ......................... 213 Rear Seat (Folding Down) ........................ 193 Rear Seats.................................................. 192 Rearview Mirror........................................ 186 Refueling................................................... 552 Fuel Gauge .............................................. 104 Gasoline .......................................... 552, 642 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 79 Regulations ............................... 488, 591, 645 Remote Engine Start ................................ 454 Remote Transmitter ................................. 141 Replacement Battery .................................................... 599 Bulbs....................................................... 579 Front Wiper Blade Rubber ....................... 584 Fuses............................... 631, 632, 633, 634 Rear Wiper Blade Rubber......................... 586 Tires ........................................................ 594 Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 646 Reverse Tilt Door Mirror .......................... 187 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ......... 527 On and Off.............................................. 529 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator.................................................... 87 S Safe Driving ................................................ 31 Safety Check ............................................... 36 Safety Labels............................................... 74 Safety Message............................................. 1 Seat Belts .................................................... 37 Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 41 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 39 Checking................................................... 44 Detachable Anchor.................................... 42 Fastening .................................................. 40 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt.................................................. 66 Pregnant Women ...................................... 43 Reminder .................................................. 38 Index Paddle Shifters (Sequential Mode) ... 22, 467 Panic Mode............................................... 160 Parking ..................................................... 539 Parking Brake........................................... 535 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator ................................................. 629 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)..................................... 76 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red).......................................... 76 Parking Sensor System............................. 541 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator................. 56 Passing Indicators..................................... 169 Phone........................................................ 113 Playing Bluetooth® Audio ............... 248, 307 Power Tailgate ......................................... 150 木曜日 659 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 660 ページ Index 660 ２０２０年２月２０日 Warning Indicator................................ 38, 79 Seat Heaters .............................. 211, 212, 213 Seat Ventilation ........................................ 212 Seats .......................................................... 188 Adjusting................................................. 188 Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support................... 189 Folding Down the Rear Seat..................... 193 Front Seats .............................................. 188 Rear Seats................................................ 192 Seat Heaters ............................ 211, 212, 213 Seat Ventilation ....................................... 212 Security System ......................................... 158 Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 83 Security System Alarm Indicator ................. 83 Select Button....................................... 21, 460 Operation .......................................... 21, 462 Selecting a Child Seat ................................. 62 Selector Knob (Audio) .............................. 233 Sequential Mode ...................................... 466 Sequential Mode Operation .................... 467 Setting the Clock ...................................... 130 Settings Arrange Apps .......................................... 117 Show Tachometer.................................... 118 Shift Button......................................... 21, 460 Shifting (Transmission) ....................... 21, 460 Shoulder Anchor......................................... 41 Show Tachometer..................................... 118 Show/Hide Apps........................................ 116 Side Airbags ................................................ 52 Side Curtain Airbags................................... 54 木曜日 午後３時２９分 Siri Eyes Free ............................................. 319 SiriusXM® Radio........................................ 287 Snow Tires................................................. 596 Social Playlist ............................................ 310 Spare Tire.......................................... 611, 643 Spark Plugs ............................................... 642 Specifications............................................ 642 Specified Fuel ................................... 552, 642 Speedometer ............................................ 105 SRS Airbags (Airbags)................................. 48 Starting Assist Brake Function................. 473 Starting the Engine .................................. 452 Does Not Start......................................... 619 Jump Starting.......................................... 622 Remote Engine Start................................ 454 Steering Wheel......................................... 185 Adjusting ................................................ 185 Heater..................................................... 214 Stopping ................................................... 539 Summer Tires ............................................ 596 Sunglasses Holder..................................... 210 Sunshades ................................................. 210 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 48 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 4, 5, 165 SYNC Mode............................................... 220 System Message Indicator.......................... 84 System Updates ........................................ 265 T Tachometer .............................................. 105 Tailgate..................................................... 148 Unable to Open ...................................... 639 Temperature Gauge .................................................... 104 Outside Temperature Display .................. 106 Temperature Gauge ................................ 104 Temperature Sensor ........................ 106, 223 Tie-down Anchors .................................... 215 Time (Setting)........................................... 130 Tire Fill Assist............................................ 630 Tire Pressure ............................................. 112 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator ................................................... 82 Tires .......................................................... 588 Air Pressure..................................... 589, 643 Checking and Maintaining ...................... 588 Inspection ............................................... 588 Labeling.................................................. 589 Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 611 Regulations............................................. 591 Rotation.................................................. 595 Spare Tire ....................................... 611, 643 Summer.................................................. 596 Tire Chains.............................................. 596 Wear Indicators....................................... 593 Winter .................................................... 596 Tools ......................................................... 610 Towing a Trailer....................................... 440 Equipment and Accessories..................... 443 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 661 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 午後３時２９分 U Under-floor Storage Area ........................ 216 Units .......................................................... 114 Unlocking the Doors ................................ 136 Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside ....................................................... 144 USB Flash Drives........................ 245, 300, 331 USB Port .................................................... 227 V Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 7 Vehicle Customization ............................. 119 Vehicle Identification Number ................ 644 Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) ................ 477 Off Button ............................................... 478 System Indicator ................................ 80, 477 Ventilation............................................... 218 Viscosity (Oil) .................................... 570, 643 Voice Control Operation .......................... 280 Audio Commands ................................... 282 Phone Commands ................................... 282 Voice Portal Screen .................................. 281 Voice Recognition.................................... 280 W Wallpaper ......................................... 236, 255 Warning and Information Messages ......... 91 Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 627 Warning Labels ........................................... 74 Warnings................................................... 111 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately) .............................................. 649 Watts......................................................... 642 Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 593 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 615 Wi-Fi Connection...................................... 317 Window Washers ..................................... 177 Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 578 Switch..................................................... 177 Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 161 Windshield................................................ 177 Cleaning ......................................... 602, 605 Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 218 Washer Fluid ........................................... 578 Wiper Blades ........................................... 584 Wipers and Washers................................ 177 Winter Tires .............................................. 596 Snow Tires .............................................. 596 Tire Chains .............................................. 596 Wipers and Washers................................. 177 Automatic Intermittent Wipers ................ 178 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 584 Front ....................................................... 177 Rear ........................................................ 179 Wireless Charger ...................................... 207 WMA ......................................... 245, 300, 303 Worn Tires ................................................ 588 Index Load Limits ............................................. 440 Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 449 Emergency.............................................. 636 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Indicator ................................................... 82 TPMS with Tire Fill Assist ......................... 486 Indicator ................................................. 630 Tire Fill Assist .......................................... 630 Trailer Stability Assist............................... 447 Transmission....................................... 21, 460 Automatic......................................... 21, 460 Fluid ....................................................... 577 Gear Position Indicator...................... 77, 462 Number .................................................. 644 Sequential Mode..................................... 466 Trip Computer.......................................... 109 Trip Meter ................................................ 110 Troubleshooting ...................................... 609 Blown Fuse ..................... 631, 632, 633, 634 Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 27 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 28 Emergency Towing ................................. 636 Engine Won’t Start ................................. 619 Noise When Braking ................................. 28 Overheating............................................ 625 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 611 Rear Door Won’t Open ..................... 27, 146 Warning Indicators.................................... 76 Turn Signals.............................................. 168 Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 82 木曜日 661 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 662 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 663 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 19 PASSPORT-31TGS6020.book 664 ページ ２０２０年２月２０日 木曜日 午後３時２９分 31TGS602 OM-14228 00X31-TGS-6020 owners.honda.com (U.S.) honda.ca (Canada) 2019 Honda Passport Owner’s Manual © 2020 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A.